Quarterlytics / Industrials / Integrated Freight & Logistics / Royal Mail PLC / FY2017 Annual Report

Royal Mail PLC
Annual Report 2017

RMG · LSE Industrials
Claim this profile
Ticker RMG
Exchange LSE
Sector Industrials
Industry Integrated Freight & Logistics
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2017 Annual Report · Royal Mail PLC
Loading PDF…
Royal Mail plc 

Annual Report and 
Financial Statements 
2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Welcome 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial  
statements 

Who we are ................................................................................................................... 02 
Financial and operating performance summary...................................................... 04 
Chairman’s statement .................................................................................................. 05 
Chief Executive Officer's review .................................................................................. 07 
Market overview............................................................................................................ 12 
Our business model  .................................................................................................... 14 
Our strategy................................................................................................................... 16 
Key performance indicators......................................................................................... 18 
Financial review............................................................................................................. 21 
UK Parcels, International & Letters (UKPIL).......................................................... 21 
General Logistics Systems (GLS) ............................................................................ 24 
Group results............................................................................................................. 26 
Presentation of results and Alternative Performance Measures (APMs) ......... 33 
Principal risks ................................................................................................................ 37 
Corporate responsibility ............................................................................................... 43 

Chairman’s introduction to corporate governance................................................... 48 
Board of Directors ........................................................................................................ 49 
Chief Executive’s Committee ....................................................................................... 52 
Statement of corporate governance .......................................................................... 54 
Directors’ remuneration report................................................................................... 66 
Directors’ report ............................................................................................................ 84 

Independent auditor’s report ...................................................................................... 89 
Consolidated income statement ................................................................................. 94 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income ................................................. 95 
Consolidated balance sheet......................................................................................... 96 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity........................................................... 97 
Consolidated statement of cash flows ....................................................................... 98 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements........................................................ 99 
Significant accounting policies ..................................................................................136 
Royal Mail plc – parent company financial statements .........................................146 

Other  
information 

Group five year summary (unaudited).....................................................................149 
Shareholder information............................................................................................151 
Forward-looking statements.....................................................................................152

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  01

Royal Mail plc 

|  Who we are

Who we are 

Royal Mail is the UK’s pre‑eminent delivery company. We deliver 
more letters and parcels, to more addresses in the UK, than all of 
our competitors combined. We are proud to deliver a 
‘one‑price‑goes‑anywhere’ service on a range of letters and 
parcels to around 30 million addresses, across the UK, 
six‑days‑a‑week, in our role as the UK’s sole designated Universal 
Service Provider1. Royal Mail has helped to shape the history of 
the UK and the way the world communicates for 500 years. 

We  make a very significant contribution 
to the wider UK economy. Through UK 
Parcels, International & Letters (UKPIL), our 
impact, including through employment and 
procurement, totalled £10.8 billion last year 
in terms of value added. We made the fifth 
largest contribution to the UK economy of all 
UK corporations2. General Logistics Systems 
(GLS), our pan-European parcels business, 
operates one of the largest, ground-based 
deferred parcel delivery networks in Europe. 

Our position 
E-substitution continues to drive a 
structural decline in UK addressed letter 
volumes. We forecast a four to six per cent 
annual decline (excluding the impact of 
political parties’ election mailings) in the 
medium-term. Despite this, letters are an 
important part of our business. We believe 
they will be for years to come. They account 
for around 45 per cent of our revenue as a 
Group; and almost 60 per cent of our revenue 
in the UK. Royal Mail is the largest parcel 
delivery company in the UK. But, we operate 
in a very challenging environment. We face 
significant competition from companies 
with established delivery capabilities and 
from new entrants. E-retail continues to fuel 
overall growth in parcel volumes. Growth 
available in the UK parcels market continues 
to be impacted by Amazon’s activities. 

International markets are also intensely 
competitive, as growth continues to be 
fuelled by increasing cross-border trade, 
driven by e-retail. 

1  Under the Postal Services Act 2011 (‘the Act’), Ofcom 
is the regulator for postal services in the UK. Ofcom’s 
primary regulatory duty for postal services is to 
secure the provision of the Universal Postal Service. 
Ofcom has designated Royal Mail as the Universal 
Service Provider. 

2  2016-17: comprising direct and indirect contributions. 

Our people 
We employ around 159,000 people across 
our Group. One in every 185 jobs in the UK is 
provided by Royal Mail3. We are committed to 
preserving the trust members of the public 
place in Royal Mail and our hard-working 
employees. 78 per cent of our customers say 
they are favourable to us, while 88 per cent 
are satisfied with the service we provide, 
putting us ahead of the companies surveyed4. 
Royal Mail also ranks as the most trusted and 
most preferred delivery company in Business 
CSI’s Brand Tracker 2016-17 survey. 

Our strong brand position means we are 
proud to offer the best pay and terms 
and conditions in our industry. The vast 
majority of our employees are employed 
on permanent contracts, except where 
there is a short-term need. Our permanent 
employees are paid above the Living Wage 
which, in turn, is above the legal minimum 
set by the UK Government. They also 
receive the additional benefits associated 
with permanent employment, such as paid 
holidays and a good pension. In return, 
however, we continually work with our 
unions to agree changes to our working 
practices and labour model. This process 
of change is about sustaining our business 
now and in the future, particularly given the 
decline in letter revenues. 

Our customers 
Royal Mail Group has a wide range of 
customers using our letters, parcels and 
data services. This includes consumers, 
small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), 
some of the UK’s largest businesses and 
retailers, and other postal operators who use 
our downstream network. (This is where a 
postal operator other than Royal Mail collects 
mail from the customer, sorts it and then 

3  Cebr research, conducted for Royal Mail in May 2017. 
4  Ipsos MORI Corporate Image Survey Winter 2016. 

02 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

transports it to Royal Mail for delivery.) GLS 
also provides a whole range of business-to-
business (B2B) and business-to-consumer 
(B2C) services across continental Europe. 

Only Royal Mail delivers to all parts of the 
country to the same high service standards 
with a geographically uniform tariff. In May 
2016, our regulator, Ofcom, found that the 
postal services sector saw an increase in 
customers' perception of value for money 
from 2005 to 2015. This was at a time when 
ratings declined in many other sectors5. 
Ofcom did further research on value for 
money in post that concluded 75 per cent of 
residential consumers said that they were 
either fairly or very satisfied with the value 
for money of postal services6. 

Royal Mail adheres to a stringent set of 
regulatory standards for the delivery of 
parcels and letters. Consumer protections 
are key. Royal Mail has the greatest number 
of protections for parcels customers. Other 
major parcel operators have limited or no 
regulatory consumer protection standards 
applied to them. 

Our shareholders 
Royal Mail is part of the fabric of UK life. 
As such, we are pleased to have a large 
and diverse shareholder base. We have a 
proactive programme of engagement with all 
of our shareholders, including institutional 
investors in the UK and overseas. Following 
our flotation on the London Stock Exchange 
in 2013, we have a relatively large retail 
shareholder base. It includes many of our 
own people. 

All of our eligible full-time employees 
have received a maximum of 913 Free 
Shares, regardless of grade. This means 
that, in total, 12 per cent of the Company 
has been awarded to eligible colleagues. 
This is one of the largest free stakes made 
available to employees as part of any major 
UK privatisation. 

Our transformation 
Our UK operation is organised to deliver to 
every household and business in the UK, 
Monday to Saturday. This means we benefit 
when we deliver letters and parcels together. 
More than 90 per cent of the parcels we 
handle in the UK pass through the Royal 
Mail core network, which delivers the 
Universal Service. 

We will continue to invest a significant 
amount of cash in our core network, although 
we are now past the peak of investment. 

5  Ofcom, Consultation on Review of the Regulation of 

Royal Mail, 25 May 2016, Paragraph 4.12. 

6  Ofcom, Review of the Regulation of Royal Mail, 

1 March 2017, Paragraph 3.17.

At present, around 80 per cent of our revenue 
comes from our UK business. We also want 
to develop a broader revenue base and 
grow in the UK and overseas. GLS remains 
a focus for investment to help drive growth 
as it continues to expand, including into 
new geographies. It provides exposure to 
markets where revenues are growing above 
gross domestic product (GDP). It is well 
positioned to support our overall strategy 
by increasing its footprint and focusing on 
growth opportunities in the deferred parcels 
space, and selective growth in the B2C 
parcels market. In addition, in the UK, we 
are actively looking at areas where there 
is market opportunity and the potential to 
make the most of our assets. They include 
our large network infrastructure, our trusted 
brand and our data. 

We need to stay ahead of the competition 
in both letters and parcels if we are to 
remain our customers’ number one choice. 
In the medium-term, the faster areas of 
growth in the parcels market are expected 
to be clothing and footwear, returns and 
‘same-day’ delivery. We are becoming 
more flexible to accommodate the needs 
of e-retailers and online shoppers. This 
includes increasing the number of pick-up 
and drop-off points in our network, better 
systems integration with retailers and 
extending acceptance times at Mail Centres 
and Regional Distribution Centres. 

We are also seeking to become a digital 
organisation and build our overall 
e-commerce capability. Becoming a digital 
business is about fundamentally changing 
the way we use technology and data. It is 
about changing our internal and external 
processes. In so doing, we aim to digitise as 
many of these as possible. With better use 
of technology and data, we can create better 
products, services and customer experience. 
We want to be able to help our customers 
with every step: from purchase, to delivery, 
to returns. 

Our operations and networks 
UKPIL 
UKPIL comprises Royal Mail’s core UK and 
international parcels and letters delivery 
businesses under the ‘Royal Mail’ and 
‘Parcelforce Worldwide’ brands. Royal Mail’s 
network is unparalleled in the UK in its 
scale and scope. It supports the provision 
of services for the collection, sorting and 
delivery of parcels and letters by Royal Mail. 
This includes those services Royal Mail 
provides as the UK’s designated Universal 
Service Provider. Parcelforce Worldwide is a 
leading provider of express parcel services. 

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

GLS 
GLS is our European parcels business. 
It operates one of the largest ground-
based, parcel delivery networks in Europe. 
The GLS network covers 41 European 
countries and nation states through a 
combination of wholly-owned companies and 
partner companies. 

The GLS footprint was expanded this year. 
In Europe, GLS acquired Agencia Servicios 
Mensajería S.A.U. (ASM) in Spain. As part 
of its careful and focused expansion outside 
Europe, GLS acquired Golden State Overnight 
Delivery Service Inc. (GSO) and Postal 
Express7. GSO is a leading provider of 
regional next day delivery services principally 
in California8. Postal Express is a regional 
overnight carrier operating in the states of 
Washington, Oregon and Idaho. 

UKPIL 
c.142,000 

Employees 

6 

GLS 
c.17,000 

Employees 

62 

Regional Distribution Centres 

Network hubs 

c.1,100 

Depots 

c.17,000 

Parcel shops 

389 

Mail Centres 

c.1,400 

Delivery Offices 

c.11,600 

Local Collect locations 

54 

Parcelforce Worldwide depots 

c.48,00010 

Vehicles 

Key

 UKPIL

 GLS

 GLS Network 
Partners

7  Postal Express was acquired after the financial year end. 
8  GSO also operates in Arizona, Nevada and New Mexico. 
9  Ipswich Mail Centre has ceased outward processing but 
continues inward processing until the second quarter 
of 2017-18. 

10  Includes around 2,300 trailers.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  03

Royal Mail plc 

|  Financial and operating performance summary

Financial and operating 
performance summary 

Group financial summary1 

Reported results (£m) 

Revenue

Operating profit before transformation costs

Operating profit after transformation costs

Profit before tax

Basic earnings per share – continuing 
operations (pence)

In-year trading cash flow

Net debt 

Proposed full year dividend per share (pence)

Adjusted results (£m) 

Revenue

Operating profit before transformation costs

Operating profit after transformation costs

Margin 

Profit before tax

Basic earnings per share (pence)

Business units 

52 weeks ended 
26 March 2017 

 52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 

Underlying2 
change 

9,776

490

353

335

27.5p

420

(338)

23.0p

9,776

712

575

5.9%

559

44.1p

9,251

485 

294 

267 

21.5p 

254 

(224) 

22.1p

9,251

742

551

6.0%

538 

41.3p 

1% 

4% 

1% 

(6)% 

2% 

10bps 

52 weeks 
ended 
26 March 
2017 

7,658

2,118

9,776

Revenue 

52 weeks 
ended 
27 March 
2016 

7,671

1,580

9,251

Underlying 
change 

(2%)

9%

1%

Adjusted operating 
profit before 
transformation costs 

52 weeks 
ended 
26 March 
2017 

52 weeks 
ended 
27 March 
2016 

548

164

712

625 

117 

742 

(£m) 

UKPIL

GLS

Group

Group performance1,2 
•  Revenue was up one per cent on an 

underlying basis. Growth in GLS more 
than offset the decline in UKPIL revenue. 

•  Adjusted operating profit before 

transformation costs was £712 million, 
down six per cent. 

•  Adjusted operating profit margin after 
transformation costs increased on an 
underlying basis by 10 basis points. 

•  Reported operating profit before 

transformation costs was £490 million. 

•  We are past the peak of investment spend. 
Net cash investment was £492 million 
compared to £656 million in 2015-16. 

• 

In-year trading cash flow increased to 
£420 million. 

•  Net debt increased to £338 million 

•  The Board is recommending a final dividend 
of 15.6 pence per ordinary share, giving a 
total dividend of 23.0 pence per share for 
2016-17, up four per cent. 

1  Reported results are prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Adjusted 
results exclude the pension charge to cash difference and specific items, consistent with the way that financial 
performance is measured by Management and reported to the Board. 

2  Movements are presented on an underlying basis. For further details of reported results, adjusted and underlying 
Alternative Performance Measures (APMs) used in the Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17, including 
reconciliations to the closest IFRS measures where appropriate, see page 33. 

3  Internal estimate based on Triangle Management Services/RMG Fulfilment Market Measure (2015); defined as 

individually addressed parcels and packets, generated and delivered in the UK, weighing up to 30kg, that do not 
require special handling. Includes access fulfilment large letters & parcels and excludes click-and-collect, 
same-day, small local operators and all international traffic. Excludes Amazon Logistics and other retailers 
own-delivery networks.

04 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Business performance1,2 
•  UKPIL revenue was down two per cent. 

Parcel revenue increased by three per cent; 
total letter revenue declined by five per cent. 

•  UKPIL parcel volumes were up three 

per cent, driven by growth in Royal Mail 
account parcels. 

•  Addressed letter volumes (excluding 

the impact of political parties’ election 
mailings) declined by six per cent. 
As previously stated, overall business 
uncertainty in the UK is impacting letters. 

•  Strategic focus on costs drove a one per cent 
reduction in UKPIL underlying operating 
costs before transformation costs. This is the 
third year of underlying UKPIL cost reduction. 

•  UKPIL collections, processing and delivery 
productivity improved by 2.7 per cent. This 
is at the better end of our target range. 

•  We exceeded our 93.0 per cent regulatory 
First Class mail target, with 93.1 per cent 
delivered the next working day. We also 
exceeded our regulatory Quality of Service 
target of 98.5 per cent for Second Class Mail. 

•  GLS performed well. Volumes and 

underlying revenue were up nine per cent. 
GLS achieved revenue growth in almost all 
its markets from a broad customer base. 

•  As part of a careful and focused expansion 
by GLS, it acquired GSO in California and 
ASM in Spain. 

Outlook summary 
•  Responding to challenging operating 

environment and continuing to focus on 
sustainable cash generation. 

•  Expect to keep in step with addressable UK 
parcels market3 growth of around three per 
cent due to IT-enabled improvements. 

•  Maintain outlook for addressed letter 

volume decline of between four to six per 
cent per annum (excluding the impact of 
political parties’ election mailings) – expect 
to be at higher end of range of decline in 
2017-18 if business uncertainty persists. 

focused international expansion to help 
drive growth for the Group. 

•  Remain on track to avoid around 

£600 million of annualised operating costs 
in UKPIL by 2017-18. 

•  Expect net cash investment of around 
£450 million in 2017-18 and less than 
£500 million per annum going forward. 

•  Progressive dividend policy supported by 
in-year trading cash flow generation of 
the Group. 

following the acquisition of GSO and ASM. 

•  Continue to invest in GLS’ careful and 

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Dividends and Free Shares 
Our employees own a significant proportion 
of the Company. In fact, I am delighted to 
be able to say that, following the disposal 
of HM Government’s holding in 2015-16, 
12 per cent of the Company has been awarded 
to eligible colleagues. This means that eligible 
full-time employees have now received a 
maximum of 913 Free Shares, regardless 
of grade. 

The Board is committed to our progressive 
dividend policy. The Board recommends the 
payment of a final dividend of 15.6 pence per 
ordinary share on 28 July 2017, giving a total 
dividend of 23.0 pence per share for 2016-17, 
subject to shareholder approval at our 2017 
Annual General Meeting (AGM). The proposed 
total dividend is a four per cent increase on the 
total dividend of 22.1 pence per ordinary share 
for 2015-16. 

Connecting companies, 
customers and communities 
We are the proud provider of the Universal 
Service. We are committed to the 
Government’s overarching policy objective 
– delivering a high quality Universal Service 
without recourse to public subsidy. 

The postal Universal Service Obligation (USO) 
is vital for economic growth. It is a key part 
of the digital economy and is a key enabler 
of the Government’s broadband strategy. 
As the physical fulfilment arm of the digital 
economy, I am pleased to report that the 
USO has high customer satisfaction ratings. 
As Ofcom recently noted, 82 per cent of 
residential consumers are either fairly or very 
satisfied with Royal Mail services1. 

Royal Mail is the delivery partner of choice 
for UK SMEs. Research we commissioned 
from Triangle Management shows that the 
Universal Service provides depth of coverage, 
value for money and convenience for SMEs 
(see overleaf). The substantial investments 
we are making in our business – major 
digitisation programmes such as the roll-out 
of Postal Digital Assistants (PDAs) – are 
helping SMEs to develop their e-commerce 
proposition by providing more information 
to their customers about the journey of their 
parcels. The vital role of the letter for many 
businesses, including SMEs, also remains very 
much in place. 

We are an international parcels business, 
both through our UK and GLS operations. 
GLS provides geographical diversification of 
our earnings. It is well positioned to grow 
in new markets. This includes careful and 
focused expansion outside Europe. 

This year – in Europe itself – GLS acquired 
ASM in Spain. Further afield, it purchased 

1  Ofcom, Review of the Regulation of Royal Mail, 

1 March 2017, paragraph 3.16.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  05

Chairman’s statement 

2016-17 has been another year of significant change. 
In my first full year as your Chairman, I have seen 
first-hand – in this our 500th year – the pivotal role 
this institution plays supporting households, businesses 
and communities. 

We connect companies, customers and communities 
across the UK through Royal Mail and overseas through 
GLS, our pan-European parcels business. GLS is 
strategically important to the Group. It is a focus for 
investment to help drive growth as it continues to expand, 
including into new geographies. 

We are committed to the Universal Service, delivering 
sustainable value for our shareholders and being a high 
quality employer. Our delivery services, including the 
Universal Service, are an important part of the digital 
economy. We are working with our key stakeholders to 
provide the Universal Service, deliver innovation and 
growth and create sustainable shareholder value. 

Royal Mail plc 

|  Chairman’s statement

GSO and Postal Express2. As our gateway 
to Europe and the US, GLS is a strategically 
important part of the Royal Mail Group. 

Value for money: 

•  Royal Mail offers a very competitive 

service across lighter parcels. 

•  Other than Royal Mail, only one 

alternative provider offers Saturday 
delivery at no extra charge. 

Depth of coverage: 

•  Royal Mail provides universal 

coverage. Only two other companies 
offer all their products everywhere, 
including rural areas. 

•  80 per cent of UK addresses are 

within one kilometre of a Royal Mail 
parcel access point. 

Triangle Management Insights, 2015. 

A responsible employer 
Royal Mail is proud to be a responsible 
employer. We offer the best pay and terms 
and conditions in our industry. We welcome 
the ongoing Taylor Review; it is currently 
looking at employment conditions across the 
UK, including the delivery sector. We believe 
co-ordinated and effective Government action 
is required to lift labour standards. Better 
labour standards will lead to better service 
standards for consumers. 

We are committed to continuing to provide 
the best pay and terms and conditions in our 
industry. In return, however, we continually 
work with our unions to agree changes to 
our working practices and labour model. This 
process of change is about sustaining our 
business now and in the future, particularly 
given the decline in letter revenues. 

The safety of our employees is always 
our first priority. In 2016-17, we delivered 
a 12.3 per cent reduction3 in road traffic 
collisions, one of our 2016-17 key 
performance indicators (KPIs). 

A responsible company 
Royal Mail is a great British brand. We are 
part of many local communities. We deliver 
to all parts of the country to the same service 
standards and have a dense network of 
access points for local communities. As the 
Government seeks to stimulate growth 
outside major metropolitan areas, we 
have an important role to play in this key 
policy area. 

2  Postal Express was acquired after the financial 

year end. 

3  As calculated per 1,000 vehicles.

Alongside our direct and indirect economic 
contributions, there is, of course, the broader 
role we play in UK life. That is why I have once 
again been humbled by the dedication and 
commitment of our people to raise money 
for good causes. March 2017 saw the end of 
our successful partnership with the Stroke 
Association, for which we have raised a total 
of £2 million, including matched giving from 
Royal Mail. We – in short, our colleagues – 
hold the Guinness World Record for the most 
registered charities supported by a payroll 
giving scheme. Since the scheme began in 
1989, almost £58 million has been raised 
for hundreds of registered charities and 
good causes. 

GLS is active in supporting community causes 
across Europe. In November 2016, GLS 
Denmark was named as one of the top five 
large Danish companies to work for by the 
international Great Place to Work Institute. 
In the Netherlands, GLS launched a partnership 
with Heppie, a charity that provides outings and 
activities for disadvantaged children. 

Last year, I touched on the importance of mental 
health. Poor mental health is a leading cause of 
illness in the UK and our workforce. This year 
we will be devoting more resources to this key 
issue. We are a signatory of the Time to Change 
pledge, which aims to end the stigma of mental 
ill-health. We became an official supporter of 
the ‘Heads Together’ campaign, led by their 
Royal Highnesses, The Duke and Duchess of 
Cambridge, and Prince Harry. We launched a 
ground-breaking partnership with The Prince’s 
Trust, providing funding for the charity to develop 
a mental health strategy. This will ensure that 
every young person accessing a Prince’s Trust 
programme has the mental health support 
they need. 

We are expanding our support for mental 
health by launching a strategic partnership 
with Action for Children. We are seeking 
to increase people’s awareness of mental 
health and support more of our own 
people with mental health problems. The 
partnership covers a number of key pillars: 
mental health training, awareness-raising, 
communications, pro-bono support, work 
placements and fundraising. We hope to 
raise at least £2 million to enable Action for 
Children to employ specialist youth workers 
to deliver face-to-face support sessions for 
8,000 young people aged 15-18. 

Our Board 
There have been some changes to our Board 
over the last 12 months. Nick Horler, who has 
been with us for nearly seven years and during 
a time of unprecedented change, stepped 
down from the Board in February 2017. 
Nick made an invaluable contribution and will 
be missed. Rita Griffin, a senior executive at 
BP, joined us during the year; her expertise in 
marketing, logistics and change management 

will be very helpful as we continue to 
transform Royal Mail. 

In December 2016, Matthew Lester informed 
the Board of his intention to step down as 
Chief Finance Officer (CFO) and leave the Board 
following the Company’s AGM in July 2017. 
Matthew has made a very considerable 
contribution to our business across a wide 
range of areas during the seven years he has 
been with us. We are grateful he is staying 
beyond his contractual notice period. Moya 
and I join the Board in offering him our sincere 
thanks and best wishes for the future. 

On 15 May 2017, we announced that Stuart 
Simpson, Director of Group Finance, will be 
appointed CFO and join the Royal Mail Board 
at the conclusion of the AGM on 20 July 2017. 
Stuart's appointment follows a comprehensive 
search that included both internal and 
external candidates. 

Turning to broader issues, as I mentioned in 
last year’s Annual Report, the effectiveness 
of the Board, its Committees, the Executive 
Directors, Non-Executive Directors, and the 
Chairman was assessed from January-March 
2016 by an external consultancy. The review 
covered a range of topics, including succession 
planning, operations, composition, skills and 
experience. This year, the review was carried 
out internally and the main findings are set 
out on page 57. The review concluded that the 
Board and its Committees are effective but 
identified areas of focus that will strengthen 
the performance of the Board overall. 

Thank you 
This is a very special Company. The 500th 
anniversary of the postal service in 2016 was 
a major milestone that deserved celebration. 
At a special 500 years event we hosted, 
Moya and I were delighted to welcome Their 
Royal Highnesses The Prince of Wales and 
The Duchess of Cornwall. In his speech, the 
Prince praised our contribution to the British 
economy and offered his heartfelt thanks and 
congratulations. It was a privilege to introduce 
the Royal couple to so many inspirational 
people from across our business. 

Thanks to the continued hard work, 
commitment and dedication of our people, 
Royal Mail is making a difference on a daily 
basis. I look forward to playing a part in our 
continued focus on delivering shareholder 
value. This is about working together with 
our people, our unions and our customers to 
deliver innovation and growth and become a 
more efficient business. 

Peter Long 
Chairman 
17 May 2017

06 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Our performance1,2 
Group revenue was up one per cent. GLS 
performed well, with revenue growth 
of nine per cent more than offsetting a 
two per cent reduction in UKPIL revenue. 

Adjusted Group operating profit before 
transformation costs was £712 million and 
£575 million after transformation costs. 
Adjusted Group operating profit margin after 
transformation costs increased by 10 basis 
points to 5.9 per cent. 

UKPIL parcel volumes grew by three per 
cent and revenue increased by three per cent. 
Addressed letter volumes (excluding the 
impact of political parties’ election mailings) 
decreased by six per cent, while total letter 
revenue was down five per cent. 

We are past the peak of investment so our 
spend reduced this year. As a result, in-year 
trading cash flow increased to £420 million. 

Winning in parcels 
Competitive marketplaces 
We are the UK’s pre-eminent parcel delivery 
company with over 50 per cent of market 
share by volume. At 56 per cent3, parcels 
account for a higher proportion of Royal 
Mail’s Group revenue than for any of our 
benchmarked peers. We connect businesses, 
households and communities up and down 
the country. As the Universal Service 
Provider, Royal Mail facilitates e-commerce 
growth for UK businesses, especially SMEs. 

The UK has one of the most developed 
e-commerce markets in the world. Amazon 
has an extensive presence in retailing as well 
as logistics, including delivery. It is expanding 
its presence, including in a range of new 
segments. Growth available in the addressable 
UK parcels market continues to be impacted by 
Amazon's activities. There is significant spare 
capacity in the market at non-peak times of 
the year, putting downward pressure on prices. 
Competition remains intense. International 
express carriers are showing renewed interest in 
UK e-commerce. 

In the consumer/SME segment, product and 
service innovations provide more choice and 
convenience for customers. For example, 
e-commerce services are evolving to provide 

1  Adjusted results exclude the pension charge to cash 
difference and specific items, consistent with the way 
that financial performance is measured by 
Management and reported to the Board. 

2  Movements are presented on an underlying basis. 

For further details of adjusted and underlying 
Alternative Performance Measures (APMs) used in 
the Annual Report and Financial Statements, 
including reconciliations to the closest IFRS 
measures where appropriate, see page 33. 

3  Based on 2016 calendar year.

Chief Executive Officer's 
review 

We have made good progress against all of our strategic 
priorities. This has been a more challenging period for UK 
businesses and we have come through it well. Our multi-year 
focus on costs is a key priority. We are on track to avoid around 
£600 million of annualised costs in UKPIL by 2017-18. We are 
past the peak of investment; we now expect net cash investment 
of around £450 million in 2017-18. GLS is performing very well 
and is growing revenue organically and through acquisitions. 
Its deep expertise and focus on B2B parcels in multiple 
geographies – now 41 European countries and seven states in 
the US – positions it to be a greater force for growth for the 
Company. We will continue to invest in careful and focused 
international expansion by GLS. Through a combination of our 
strategic approach to costs and more efficient investment spend, 
we will support our progressive dividend policy with the in-year 
trading cash generation of the Group. 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  07

Royal Mail plc 

|  Chief Executive Officer's review

greater visibility over delivery windows and 
more control over delivery options. 

International markets are intensely 
competitive. E-retail continues to fuel growth 
in cross-border parcel volumes. There is 
increasing demand for faster services and 
tracked products. Intra-European e-commerce 
trade is growing. This is driving cross-border 
volumes and a significant part of the growth is 
B2C. The European deferred parcels segment 
grew faster than the express segment4. 

Our progress 
•  Around two-thirds of our parcels 

are barcoded and one-third can be 
tracked in some way 

•  We can offer any retail account 
customer a tracked product 

•  We have improved our 
international services 

•  We strengthened GLS’ network and 

extended the service offering in Spain 

The depth of coverage, value for money and 
convenience for customers is unparalleled – 
wherever they are based in the UK. We operate 
in every business segment of the parcels 
market. Our tracked products continue to grow 
at a fast rate. We can offer any retail account 
customer a tracked product. Royal Mail Tracked 
24®/48® volumes have grown by 38 per cent; 
returns volumes are up 18 per cent. Our major 
technology rebuild over the last five years has 
been a key enabler for the repositioning of what 
was already a very good parcel business. Our 
customer service is good and we focus on key 
areas like complaints, where we have more 
work to do. We have the highest standards of 
consumer protections for our parcels customers. 

We deliver more parcels each year in the 
UK than all of our competitors combined. 
The service and product improvements we 
put in place are delivering real benefits. 
We have won further volumes from major 
retailers, including Vistaprint and River 
Island. Senders and recipients now have 
better visibility of when their parcel has been 
delivered. When we started using the new 2D 
data-rich barcodes in 2015, we were tracking 
around 20 per cent of our parcels. Today, 
enabled by our enhanced IT parcels systems, 
around two-thirds of parcels are barcoded 
and one-third can be tracked in some way. 
We aim to barcode as many of our parcels 
as possible. 

We have focused on improving average unit 
revenues (AUR) in import parcels by improving 
the service levels we offer and securing better 
Universal Postal Union (UPU) rates. International 

accounts for 18 per cent of UKPIL parcel 
volumes and 19 per cent of revenue. We reported 
in 2015-16 a reduction in export volumes, so 
we built a better solution for exports. The rate of 
decline in export parcel volumes has moderated 
significantly. Exports have high AURs but higher 
cost of sales too. 

Pursuing faster-growing areas of 
the UK and international markets 
We are targeting higher growth areas; for 
example, clothing and footwear. We have 
worked with e-retailers to be more flexible 
about the dimensions of the parcels 
we handle. 

We have expanded our relationships with 
retailers and network partners to maximise 
the opportunities developing from cross-
border volume growth between the UK 
and Asia. For example, we are working 
with China Post to provide Chinese and 
UK customers with faster delivery and a 
tracked service. 

GLS is performing well and is growing 
revenue organically and through acquisitions. 
Its deep expertise and focus on parcels 
positions it to be a force for growth for 
the Company. We will continue to invest in 
careful and focused international expansion 
by GLS. 

As in the UK, B2C is the fastest growing 
segment in the European parcels market. 
GLS provides new points of synergy for 
our international business based in the UK. 
It also continues to develop its premium B2C 
delivery services. Launched in Germany in 
April 2016, GLS Sameday offers same-day 
evening deliveries in 11 cities, providing an 
attractive offering for online shoppers. We are 
able to leverage the deep expertise of GLS 
to help forge a presence in new areas, for 
example, our careful expansion in the US. 

Adding value by improving our 
products and services 
Improving the customer experience remains 
a key focus for us. This includes rolling out 
delivery confirmation for the majority of 
barcoded parcels. This informs the sender 
whether a parcel has been delivered, or 
returned to the Delivery Office. 

We are the delivery partner of choice for 
the UK’s SMEs. There are 5.4 million SMEs 
in the UK generating 47 per cent of total 
UK turnover (£1.8 trillion)5. We support the 
growth of SMEs through extended weekend 
collections. Local Collect remains the largest 
UK network of click and collect locations, 
with around 11,600 sites. 

We have made it easier for customers to 
access our international services. We have 
built on our shipping solutions, using the 
cross-border capabilities of Intersoft. With 
Intersoft, we have developed our export 
solutions and now have the capability to offer 
tracked cross-border outbound and returns 
services to our larger customers. 

In Europe, GLS recently expanded GLS-ONE 
in Germany. This is a portal to facilitate the 
sending and receiving of parcels. Consumers 
can create their own label to send a parcel 
and have it delivered to a specific address, 
parcel box or GLS ParcelShop. 

Expanding and automating 
our networks 
Our first parcel sorting machine is now in 
operation in Swindon. It can sort and scan 
around 10,000 small parcels per hour. 
Machines are currently being installed 
at Home Counties North, Greenford and 
Chelmsford Mail Centres. Subject to 
successful deployment of the first set of 
machines, further machines are planned to 
be installed over the next two years. We have 
worked closely with our unions on this. 

We have a denser network of parcel access 
points for shipping, returns and collections 
than our competitors6. Sending customers 
can use approximately 11,500 Post Office 
branches and around 1,200 Royal Mail 
Customer Service Points to drop off pre-paid 
items for delivery within the UK. Over 
250 Customer Service Points are now open 
on a Sunday, covering 38 per cent of all 
delivery points across the UK. 

Parcelforce Worldwide, our express parcels 
business, has improved services for 
heavy and bulky parcels. Parcelforce has 
introduced two new next day services for 
contract customers. It has also extended 
the express48large service for consumers. 
It builds on Parcelforce's position as a 
premium quality carrier within the courier 
express market. 

The recent acquisition (June 2016) of ASM 
has significantly extended the GLS service 
offering in Spain, in particular, in the B2C 
segment, where growth rates are expected 
to be higher than B2B. GLS Spain now has a 
much bigger footprint both in terms of size 
and scale. ASM has exceeded performance 
expectations since acquisition. Given the 
potential synergies, the transaction is 
expected to be economic profit accretive for 
GLS in 2018-19. 

GLS has also rolled out its ParcelLockers in 
four countries across Eastern Europe – the 

4  Effigy Consulting: European Courier, Express and 
Parcel 2016 Market Summary of 2014-15 data. 

5  National Federation of Self Employed & Small 

Businesses Limited.

6  Triangle Management Insights, 2015.

08 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

mail and secured all major UK mail operators’ 
commitment to it. We changed the terms 
and conditions for retail customers. We can 
now check items we suspect to be scam 
mail, refuse to process or deliver them and 
terminate a customer’s contract in certain 
circumstances. Since launching this new 
scheme, we have stopped over 700,000 
suspect mail items from reaching customers. 

Since November 2016, over 700,000 
items of scam mail have been stopped 
from reaching customers. 

Following the year end, we launched a major 
new initiative for customers who – we believe 
– are receiving high volumes of scam mail. 
We will block and impound scam mail at our 
major distribution centres before it reaches 
the customer’s letterbox. Legitimate business 
and personal mail will continue to be delivered 
to the customer in the usual way. This latest 
anti-scam initiative will initially focus on the 
most impacted customers, with plans for it to 
be extended in the future. 

Regulation 
The USO is a key driver of UK economic growth. 
It is a key part of the digital economy – the 
physical fulfilment arm – and is crucial to the UK’s 
economic future. 

We note that Ofcom continues to find high 
levels of customer satisfaction and value for 
money with postal services. Ofcom has also 
recognised our progress on efficiency. 

We are disappointed that Ofcom does not 
agree with us that there is a pressing need 
for a proactive framework to help sustain the 
Universal Service. There is a real need to ensure 
that the revenue pools that sustain the USO are 
underpinned. We need a proactive sustainability 
framework and a focus on removing regulation 
which restricts these vital revenue pools. 

In a similar vein, we welcome the UK 
Government’s focus on employment 
models, and in particular, the Taylor Review. 
We believe there is a public policy issue 
around fictitious self-employment and poor 
labour standards in the delivery sector. 
A level playing field is needed.

first parcel provider to do so. More than 
70 terminals have been installed, offering 
consumers an easy to use and secure way of 
receiving their parcels. Other options include 
collecting parcels from a GLS ParcelShop or 
delivery within a certain time frame. 

We have rolled out initiatives to mitigate 
the impact of e-substitution and business 
uncertainty on letter volumes and revenues. 
Through our MarketReach business, we are 
demonstrating the positive impact marketing 
mail can have on campaign results. 

Defending letters 
•  Rolling out collaborative projects with 

the advertising industry 

•  Continuing to win back and retain 

key contracts 

•  Coordinating an industry-wide 

response to tackle fraudulent mail at 
its source 

We are seeing the impact of overall business 
uncertainty in the UK on letter volumes, in 
particular on advertising and business letters. 
Marketing mail is sensitive to changes in 
economic activity. In 2016-17, our marketing 
mail revenue decreased by eight per cent, the 
same trend as at the half year. Other forms 
of advertising, particularly print media, have 
seen steeper declines. In 2016, there was an 
overall decline of 10 per cent in direct mail. 
Print advertising saw a 13 per cent decline 
in revenues7. 

In March 2017, the price of a First Class 
stamp increased by 1p to 65p and the price of 
a Second Class stamp went up by 1p to 56p. 
These changes are needed to help ensure the 
sustainability of the Universal Postal Service. 
Royal Mail’s stamp prices are amongst the 
best value in Europe. The UK has one of the 
highest quality of service specifications of any 
major European country. 

From the Residential Postal Tracker 2016, 
Ofcom found that a large majority of 
residential customers said that they were 
satisfied with postal services overall in 
2016. 82 per cent of respondents stated 
they were either ‘very satisfied’ or ‘fairly 
satisfied’ with Royal Mail's services8. In a 
previous report, the regulator also found 
postal services/delivery to be the only 
sector where customers’ perceptions of 
value for money had increased from 2005 
to 20159. 

Promoting the value of mail 
This year, we launched and built upon a 
number of initiatives to add value to letters. 
We are working with mailing customers 
and access operators to incentivise 
customer mailings. 

7  WARC expenditure report for 2016 calendar year. 
8  Ofcom, Review of the Regulation of Royal Mail, 

1 March 2017, Paragraph 3.17. 

9  Ofcom, Consultation on Review of the Regulation of 

Royal Mail, 25 May 2016, Paragraph 4.12.

The Strategic Mailing Partnership™, a joint 
initiative with the mailing house industry, 
promotes mail through collaboration and 
working to resolve critical industry issues. It aims 
to improve overall efficiency and operational 
processes and to grow mail volumes. 

We are winning business. For example, in 
2016, we won a three-year contract to handle 
all London Boroughs’ postal services. We also 
announced that we had been awarded a three-
year framework to provide Scottish Public 
Bodies with postal services. The framework 
means that Royal Mail has become the supplier 
for Scottish Government, local authority and 
public body postal services. 

Improving mail handling 
We continue to transform our network with 
more automation of letter sorting and the 
reorganisation of delivery routes. We have 
increased letter sequencing to the final 
delivery point to 83 per cent. We plan to 
install more letter sorting machines and 
automation equipment for large letters. This 
is further increasing our efficiency. 

Around 80 per cent of suitable letters now 
carry a Mailmark® barcode. This enables 
sending customers to track the delivery 
progress of mail more closely and ensures 
that we are accurately billing for the services 
we provide. 

Cotswold Collections mails seven 
catalogues a year. Customers know the 
collections are unique so many orders 
are received within the first few hours 
after delivery. It is critical the business 
can respond to customer demand. 
Royal Mail’s Mailmark® has helped 
Cotswold Collections improve its business 
management with accurate tracking. 
Mailmark® allows Cotswold Collections 
to know exactly when, where and how 
many catalogues are delivered each day. 
This ensures staffing is at peak efficiency, 
reducing costs and maximising customer 
satisfaction. 

Tackling the scourge of scam mail 
We understand the upset and distress that 
scam mail causes. This year, we worked with 
our employees, industry partners and law 
enforcement agencies to tackle this issue even 
more vigorously. A range of new measures 
were implemented to strengthen our ability 
to stem the flow of scam mail. We launched 
an industry-wide Code of Practice on scam 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  09

 
Royal Mail plc 

|  Chief Executive Officer's review

Growing in new areas 
•  Acquisition of GSO and Postal Express10 

Strategic focus on costs 
•  Achieved our cost reduction targets 

•  Developed customer-facing products 
and services that leverage our data 
and relationships 

We have made investments in projects to 
support growth. We are looking at areas 
where there is a market opportunity and the 
potential to make the most of our existing 
assets, experience and relationships. 

We are an international parcels business, 
through both our UK and GLS operations. 
GLS has a very strong network. Together 
with network partners, it operates across 
42 countries with different languages, 
labour models and regulatory environments. 
In addition, its expertise and focus on parcels 
positions GLS to be an accelerating force for 
growth for the whole Company. 

In line with its strategy of targeted and 
focused geographic expansion, GLS acquired 
GSO in California. The area in which GSO 
operates has a GDP roughly equivalent to the 
UK. The region is experiencing faster GDP 
growth than both the UK and continental 
Europe. GSO is well-positioned to benefit 
from growth in intra-state deliveries within 
its existing geographic footprint. We expect 
GSO to perform in line with our expectations 
in the first full year of its ownership by the 
Group. The transaction is expected to be profit 
accretive for GLS in 2019-20. 

In April 2017, we announced the acquisition of 
the US overnight parcel delivery company, Postal 
Express. Postal Express is a regional overnight 
carrier operating in the states of Washington, 
Oregon, and Idaho. It offers overnight parcel 
delivery, mainly to B2B customers, across a 
number of industries. 

Our corporate strategy is in part enabled by 
our focus on becoming a digital organisation. 
We are becoming more digitally-enabled 
internally as well as in our interactions with 
customers and consumers. We are trialling a 
number of initiatives as part of our customer-
facing digitisation. This approach is supported 
by a more resilient IT backbone as a result 
of our major IT transformation programme. 
We have also developed apps such as 
LovetoPost, enabling customers to turn 
photographs into personalised postcards. 
In 2016-17, we saw a 60 per cent increase 
in consumers visiting our website using 
smartphones. This leaves us well placed for 
the continued growth in the use of mobile 
devices to purchase delivery services. 

for three consecutive years 

•  Delivered productivity improvement 
of 2.7 per cent in 2016-17, at the 
higher end of our target range 

•  Cost avoidance programme on track, 
with £225 million of costs avoided in 
2016-17 

•  Reducing the number of 

managerial layers 

We are transforming our UK network at an 
absorbable rate of change. UKPIL adjusted 
operating costs before transformation costs 
reduced by one per cent. This is the third year 
we have been able to deliver underlying cost 
reduction in UKPIL. 

The USO and the regulated quality of service 
standards require a large fixed cost base in 
order to be able to deliver our obligations. 
While we are proud to be the Universal 
Service Provider, it is expensive to deliver. 
In addition, our workforce has the best pay 
and terms and conditions in the industry. 
Almost 70 per cent of our UKPIL costs are in 
relation to people and their benefits. 

UKPIL collections, processing and delivery 
productivity increased by 2.7 per cent. This 
is at the better end of our target range of a 
2.0-3.0 per cent improvement per annum. This 
improvement in productivity was achieved 
through a 1.9 per cent reduction in core network 
hours, despite an increase in workload. 

We know that becoming more efficient has 
a human face. Over the last four years, we 
have seen a net reduction of around 12,000 
UKPIL employees. We continue to reduce the 
number of managerial layers – which reduces 
costs and streamlines our decision making. 
We work closely with our unions to ensure 
our people exiting the business do so with 
dignity and respect. 

Non-people costs have reduced in real 
terms by 15 per cent over the last four 
years. We continue to reduce the number 
of our facilities while ensuring we have – by 
some distance – the most accessible and 
convenient Delivery Office network in the UK. 

We are targeting to avoid around £600 million 
of annualised operating costs by 2017-1811. 
More significant cost reduction will need 
further modernisation of our processes 
and more streamlined structures. We are 
also facing the impact of wage inflation and 
increases due to employment legislation. 
In non-people costs, we are facing headwinds 

10  Postal Express was acquired after the financial 

11  Cumulative over financial years 2015-16, 2016-17 and 

year end. 

2017-18.

10 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

from increasing cost of sales associated with 
tracked parcels and export parcels growth 
and higher depreciation. 

Technology and innovation 
•  Completed roll-out of our new PDA 
technology in our core network 

• 

Introduced new functionality to our 
online postage service Click & Drop 

•  Launched our new self-service 

solution, Labels to Go 

We have invested a significant amount in 
technology over the past five years. Some key 
technological builds had to be put in place 
before we could proceed. This investment 
is making us a better, safer and more cost 
effective operation. The rollout of our new 
PDA technology is now complete in our core 
network. This is one of the largest estates of 
its kind in Europe. 

Our PDAs significantly increase our scanning 
capability. They give us more interfaces with 
our customers, expanding the number of 
interactions they have with their parcels. 
Our postmen and women handle over 
one billion parcels and nearly 15 billion 
letters every year. 

Our shipping tools – Storefeeder, for example 
– connect retail customers and give us the 
ability to dynamically capture the choices 
for end customers. We introduced new 
functionality to Click & Drop. We are leading 
the way by providing account customers with 
free access to our multi-channel despatch 
management tool. Marketplace traders can 
now use our software to integrate with the 
marketplace and print off their barcoded 
shipping labels. 

We have developed digital capabilities 
to enhance customer convenience. 
In April 2017, we launched our new self-
service solution, Labels to Go. Customers 

Click&Drop® 

What is Click & Drop? 
Our Click & Drop service integrates 
data from online shopping platforms 
(e.g. eBay, Amazon) to make it quicker 
and easier to buy postage and print 
address labels online. Individuals, 
marketplace sellers and businesses 
can manage all their sending needs. 
Customers can pay by PayPal, credit 
card or via their Royal Mail Online 
Business Account. Account features 
include multi-marketplace integration 
and the ability for customers to print 
up to 100 labels in one transaction.

buying postage online can now print off 
delivery and return labels from their mobile 
phones at the majority of our 1,200 Customer 
Service Points. 

Telemetry lowers maintenance costs due to 
improved driving styles. The more telemetry 
we have, the better our driver behaviour and 
safety should be. It is more cost effective if 
we know where our vehicles are and we are 
better able to get paid fairly for what we do.

Our workforce 
•  Exceeded our full year regulatory First 

Class target of 93.0 per cent 

•  Mean business satisfaction score 

increased to 78 

As one of the largest employers in the UK, we 
are proud to provide the best pay and terms 
and conditions in our sector. We remain 
committed to high quality employment in a 
very competitive industry. 

We know how important pensions are to our 
people. Our focus is on continuing to provide 
the best retirement benefits in the industry. 
We were sorry to have to conclude that 
the Royal Mail Pension Plan (RMPP) is not 
affordable in its current form. The RMPP was 
closed to new employees joining the Group 
from 1 April 2008. The RMPP is currently in 
surplus12 but we expect this surplus would 
run out in 2018 if members continued to build 
up benefits on the current defined benefit 
pension basis. The Company’s contributions 
would then increase to £1.15 billion a year. 
We could not increase the cash contribution 
without materially reducing the necessary 
investment in the UKPIL business. We set 
out our proposal for the RMPP’s future after 
March 2018, for consultation with all active 
members. We are committed to not making 
any changes before April 2018. 

The consultation closed on 10 March 2017. 
We have concluded that there is no affordable 
solution to keeping the RMPP open in its 
current form. Therefore, the Company has 
come to the decision that the RMPP will 
close to future accrual on 31 March 2018. 
We continue to work closely with our unions 
on a sustainable and affordable solution 
for the provision of future pension benefits. 
We will write to RMPP members once further 
decisions have been made. 

Our people are at the heart of everything 
we do. Our mean business customer 
satisfaction score – across large and medium 
sized businesses and SMEs – increased 
from 76 to 78. Royal Mail is committed to 
delivering a high Quality of Service. 

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

We are pleased to report that we exceeded 
our full year regulatory First Class target 
of 93.0 per cent, with 93.1 per cent of mail 
delivered the next day. We again exceeded 
our Second class target of 98.5 per cent, with 
a performance of 98.9 per cent. 

We were disappointed to see an increase 
in the overall number of complaints. This 
is against the backdrop of an increase in 
customer text and email delivery notifications 
as the number of tracked parcels we handle 
continues to increase. Customers have 
increased visibility over whether their parcel 
has been delivered or an attempt has been 
made to deliver it, which can lead to an 
increase in complaints. 

Royal Mail takes complaints seriously and 
we have a consistent approach to tackling 
any issues. We continue to highlight 
business standards and key procedures to 
tackle denial of receipt through the use of 
‘With your Neighbour’ cards and correct 
doorstep scanning. Our focus on tackling 
issues as quickly as possible contributed to 
an improvement in two out of our five main 
complaint categories13. 

GLS has consistently performed well since 
IPO, growing revenue on an organic basis 
as well as through acquisitions. It now 
contributes nearly a third of adjusted Group 
operating profit. We will continue to invest 
in GLS’ careful and focused international 
expansion to help drive growth for the Group. 

We now expect net cash investment of 
around £450 million in 2017-18 and less 
than £500 million per annum going forward. 
Through a combination of our strategic 
approach to costs and more efficient 
investment spend, we will support our 
progressive dividend policy with the in-year 
trading cash flow generation of the Group. 

Thank you 
The 500th anniversary of the postal service 
was all about our people – they are the 
ones who have sustained our continued 
important role over the centuries in the 
UK. Simply put, they are our Company. 
We will continue to focus on delivering 
our key mission: connecting companies, 
customers and communities and making 
e-commerce happen. 

Delivery to home remains the most 
popular way to receive a parcel. Around 
81 per cent of customers prefer delivery 
to home over other options14. 

Moya Greene 
Chief Executive Officer 
17 May 2017

Outlook 
These results demonstrate that as a business 
we can respond to our challenging operating 
environment and continue to focus on 
sustainable cash generation. 

Royal Mail operates internationally and in 
many markets with different dynamics. 

In the UK, IT-enabled innovation has 
improved our parcel offering, such that we 
expect to be able to keep in step with the 
addressable UK parcels market growth 
of around three per cent. Pricing remains 
constrained due to the highly competitive 
market but parcel revenue should benefit 
from improvements in mix. 

We maintain our outlook for addressed letter 
volume declines of between four to six per cent 
per annum (excluding the impact of political 
parties’ election mailings) over the medium 
term but would expect to be at the higher end 
of the range of decline in 2017-18 if the current 
climate of business uncertainty persists. 
We continue to focus on costs and remain on 
track to avoid around £600 million of annualised 
operating costs in UKPIL by 2017-18. 

12  On an actuarial funding basis using 2015 valuation 

assumptions. 

13  Redirections and misdeliveries. 
14  IMRG UK Consumer Home Delivery Review 2016.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  11

Royal Mail plc 

|  Market overview

Market overview 

As the Universal Service Provider, Royal Mail plays a vital role 
in the UK economy. We enable the continued growth of 
e-commerce through the Universal Service network and play 
a key part in the digital economy. The Universal Service provides 
depth of coverage, value for money and convenience for 
businesses wherever they are based in the UK1. But, we operate 
within an increasingly dynamic market. Intense competition in 
parcels and ongoing structural decline in letters makes the postal 
sector very challenging. To compete effectively, we need to 
continue to invest to meet fast changing customer expectations. 

UK parcels market 
E-commerce continues to drive parcel 
volume growth. It is estimated that online 
retail made up 14.8 per cent of all retail sales 
in 2016. This is the highest it has ever been2. 
UK customers spend more online per head 
than consumers in any other major market, 
including the US and China. 

The UK is one of Europe’s most competitive 
parcels markets, with 15 major players. 
We estimate that the blended UK parcels 
market3,4 is growing by around four per cent 
a year5. The structure and behaviour of the 
parcels market continues to be influenced 
by the rapid expansion of Amazon and its 
logistics innovations. At the same time, 
parcel carriers continue to invest in new 
capacity. Traditional retailers are improving 
their in-house collection and delivery 
services. For example, Sainsbury’s recently 
completed its £1.4 billion acquisition of 
Argos. We expect that competition will 
continue to intensify, driven by retailers’ 
investment in delivery options, logistics and 
technology to support the growth of their 
online sales. 

1  Triangle Management Insights, 2015. 
2  GlobalData, 2017. 
3  Internal estimate based on Triangle Management 
Services/RMG Fulfilment Market Measure (2015); 
defined as individually addressed parcels and 
packets, generated and delivered in the UK, weighing 
up to 30kg, that do not require special handling. 
Includes access fulfilment large letters & parcels and 
excludes click-and-collect, same-day, small local 
operators and all international traffic. 

4  Includes Amazon Logistics and other retailers 

own-delivery networks. 

5  Based on Verdict UK E-retail survey and RMG 

market insight. 

There is also an emerging threat from 
on-demand delivery platforms that speed 
up the way goods are transported in urban 
areas. Innovative logistics companies are 
starting to roll out parcel delivery services 
beyond trial stage in the US and Europe. 
They typically connect retail stores with 
local ‘individual’ couriers, enabling fast and 
flexible deliveries. 

Growth areas 
The rapid pace of change in the UK parcels 
market is expected to continue, due to low 
barriers to entry, greater disintermediation 
and disruptive business models. Next 
day parcels now account for 56 per cent 
of domestic volumes6. Next day delivery 
is increasingly becoming a standard, 
rather than a premium delivery service for 
online retailers. 

Online retail growth continues to be driven by 
advances in fulfilment, easier returns, new 
technology and ease of shopping. Clothing 
and footwear is the fastest growing sector 
online. It is also driving returns of online 
purchases, which are forecast to reach 
£5.7 billion in 20217. 

In 2016, the extension of Black Friday 
promotions for a week or longer was a big 
draw for the UK’s increasingly value-driven 
consumers. A new online peak trading 
pattern is emerging, characterised by the 
Black Friday week in November and the run 
up to Christmas. 

Home delivery remains the preferred delivery 
option for 81 per cent of consumers8. 
Nevertheless, click and collect is now 

12 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

becoming established as an alternative 
delivery option, particularly during peak 
periods, whether in the retailer’s own 
stores or through third-party parcel shops 
and lockers. 

Consumers are increasingly shopping at a 
time and place which suits them. Mobile 
commerce (M-commerce) is making it 
easier than ever for people to shop on the 
internet. In December 2016, just over half 
of all visits to e-commerce websites were 
from mobile devices9. This is the first time 
that mobile (including tablet) has overtaken 
desktop as the primary channel through 
which consumers engaged with retailers. It is 
a trend that is likely to continue as retailers 
invest more in their mobile websites and 
connectivity improves. 

UK letters market 
The UK’s letters market is significantly more 
competitive than people think. E-substitution 
is a potent form of competition. 82 per cent 
of adults use the internet on a daily basis, up 
from around 35 per cent in 200610. Addressed 
letter volumes have declined by 22 per cent 
over the last five years. Total letter revenue 
has fallen two per cent over the same period. 

We are seeing the impact of overall business 
uncertainty in the UK on letter volumes, 
in particular, advertising and business 
letters. Television, print and mail advertising 
declined in 2016, with advertisers delaying 
or substituting investment decisions and 
shifting from traditional to digital forms of 
advertising. Advertising mail has fallen from 
16 per cent to eight per cent (a c.50 per cent 
reduction) of total advertising spend since 
2001. Digital advertising represented almost 
half (47 per cent) of all advertising spend 
in 2016. 

In letters, the ‘Access’ market is, by some 
distance, the biggest in Europe. Access 
competition is where a postal operator 
other than Royal Mail collects mail from 
the customer, sorts it and then transports 
it to our Mail Centres for us to deliver. This 
enables other operators to offer postal 
services to larger business customers for 
letters and large letters without setting up 
a delivery network. Access operators now 
account for nearly 60 per cent of addressed 
inland letters in the nation’s postbag. In other 
EU markets, no more than 11 per cent of 
upstream letters volumes are handled by 
Access operators. 

International parcels 
E-retail is also fuelling growth in cross-border 
parcels. In 2016, European B2C e-commerce 
grew 12 per cent to €510 billion, with 42 billion 

6  Ofcom Annual Monitoring Update 2015-16. 
7  GlobalData eretail, April 2017. 
8  IMRG UK Consumer Home Delivery Review 2016. 

9  IMRG Capgemini Sales Index Report, January 2017. 
10  ONS: Internet Access-Households and Individuals, 

2016.

parcels sent annually11. This growth is uneven 
across Europe, due to varying economic 
performance and e-commerce adoption. 
The largest B2C parcels markets outside the 
UK are Germany, France and Italy. 

We are seeing an increasingly competitive 
environment, with operators providing 
innovative, high quality services at lower 
prices. Consumers expect a seamless 
cross-border delivery and returns 
experience12. For example, in the UK, there 
are a range of major national operators that 
deliver cross-border services, alongside 
hundreds of smaller operators looking to 
increase market share. 

A recent Royal Mail study into the international 
ambitions of small UK e-retailers found that 
35 per cent of small businesses think Europe 
holds the most potential to generate new 
sales for their business. 28 per cent think 
the USA and North America are the most 
promising markets. 

Outside the EU, Chinese e-commerce 
marketplaces Tmall and AliExpress are 
strengthening international cross-border 
services. Alibaba has reported that the value 
of goods sold on its marketplace on Singles’ 
Day (11 November) rose 32 per cent to almost 
$18 billion, compared with $14 billion last 
year. Launched in 2009, Singles’ Day now 
runs every 11 November, and has become the 
biggest global shopping event. 

11  E-commerce European B2C Report 2016. 
12  IPC cross-border e-commerce shopper survey 2016. 

Strategic report 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 
|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 
|  Financial statements 

|  Other information
|  Other information

UK leading in e-commerce 

E-commerce accounted for 

14.8% of all retail  

trade in 2016, the highest ever13. 
13  GlobalData, 2017. 

Black Friday/Cyber Week 

£25 billion 

is estimated to have been spent in 
internet sales between 13th November 
and 24th December 201614. 
14  IMRG 2016. 

M-commerce 

Mobile devices continue to account for a 
growing share of e-commerce activity15. 
15  IMRG Capgemini Sales Index Report, January 2017. 

Delivery matters 

81%of online shoppers prefer 

to have items delivered to 
their home16.
16  IMRG UK Consumer Home Delivery  

Review 2016.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  13

 
Royal Mail plc 

|  Our business model 

Our business model 

We have a clear vision to be recognised as the best delivery company in the UK and across Europe. 
Our business model leverages our resources and relationships (for example, our networks, 
our people and brand) to deliver high-quality, value for money services for sending and receiving 
customers. We benefit when we deliver letters and parcels together. But the network is expensive 
to run, particularly against the backdrop of a continuing decline in letter revenues. Parcelforce 
Worldwide, our express delivery business, provides more parcel fulfilment options – particularly for 
UK business customers. Our core UK network is unparalleled in size and scope. Our European 
business, GLS, provides geographical diversification of our earnings and is well positioned to grow in 
new markets. Through this, we generate cash to reinvest appropriately in our core business, invest 
in new growth areas and pay dividends to our shareholders. 

Operating through our resources and relationships 

Our networks 
Our role as the Universal Service Provider means Royal Mail has the capability to deliver to every address across the 
UK. Through our long‑term relationship with the Post Office, we have the largest retail network for parcels and letters. 
With Local Collect, the UK’s largest click and collect network, customers can now collect their parcels from 11,600 sites – by far 
the largest network. Parcelforce Worldwide provides additional fulfilment options, providing premium parcel services within the 
courier express market. 

GLS, one of the largest European ground‑based delivery networks, offers reliable, high‑quality parcel services, complemented 
by logistics and express services. The GLS network covers 41 European countries and nation states through a combination of 
wholly‑owned companies and partner companies. The GLS footprint was expanded this year. In Europe, GLS acquired ASM in 
Spain. As part of its careful and focused expansion outside Europe, GLS acquired the regional next day parcel delivery companies 
GSO in California and Postal Express1 in the states of Washington, Oregon, and Idaho. GLS is well positioned to support Royal Mail 
Group’s overall strategy. 

Our people 
As one of the largest employers in the UK, we are proud to provide the best pay and terms and conditions in our industry. 
One in every 185 jobs in the UK is provided by Royal Mail. We were pleased to have been named in the Times Top 50 

Employers for Women for the fourth consecutive year for our commitment to gender equality in the workplace. 

Our customers and our brand 
We deliver to around 30 million business and consumer addresses. Around 80 per cent of addresses are within one 
kilometre of a Royal Mail parcel access point. GLS has more than 270,000 customers across Europe. 

Research we commissioned found that 79 per cent of online shoppers say they trust Royal Mail, compared to 64 per cent for the 
nearest competitor2. Royal Mail ranked second globally in our industry in the Dow Jones Sustainability Indices. We are also a 
constituent of the FTSE4Good Index, ranking in the top 15 per cent of companies. 

Investment in our business 
We will continue to invest in our core network, although we are now past the peak of investment. Over the last five years, 
we have made significant investments to support growth and to replace and replenish our assets. Now that some of 

the larger projects – rebuilding our legacy IT systems and resizing the core network – are largely complete, we have reduced our 
investment spend. In 2016‑17, we invested a net £492 million, predominantly in the UK, and focused on growth.

1  Postal Express was acquired after the financial year end. 
2  Royal Mail Delivery Matters 2015, page 21.

14 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

How we create value 
Continually improving our efficiency and productivity allows us to be more competitive. This helps us 
to meet changing customer expectations. This means we are better positioned to grow our existing 
customer relationships and win new business. This, in turn, allows us to maintain financial flexibility 
to fund investment in our growth and maintain fair terms and conditions to ensure we continue to employ 
engaged and motivated people. This is the best way of delivering sustainable shareholder value. 

Continually improving efficiency 
•  Adopting a strategic approach to costs 

and efficiency 

•  Delivering efficiency improvements and 

meeting productivity targets 

•  Improving the efficiency of our logistics 

network; promoting more efficient driving 
using telemetry technology 

•  Streamlining processes in areas, including 

central functions 

Meeting changing customer expectations 
•  Increasing the number of parcels we barcode 

and scan 

•  Opened over 250 of our busiest Customer 
Service Points on Sundays, covering over 
one‑third of UK addresses 

•  Drop off pre‑paid items for delivery at around 

1,200 Customer Service Points 

•  Demonstrating the value of letters 

through initiatives such as the Strategic 
Mailing Partnership™ 

Maintaining financial flexibility 
•  Harvesting the benefits of the technology 

rebuild 

•  Investing in new areas to support growth. This 
includes the careful and focused expansion 
of GLS outside Europe. It is strategically 
important to the Group 

•  More efficient investment spend 

•  Investing in GLS which delivers higher returns 

than our core business 

Engaged, motivated people 
•  Continuing to offer the best pay and terms and 

conditions in the industry 

•  Our employees have a meaningful stake in the 

Company through the Free Share offers 

•  In total, each eligible full‑time employee, 

with the full allocation of 913 free shares, has 
received over £500 (before tax) in dividends 
since privatisation 

Outputs 
•  Continuing to deliver a 

high‑quality, financially 
sustainable Universal 
Service, and therefore 
maintaining our 
trusted brand. 

•  Delivering a consistently 
high quality, flexible 
service to grow existing 
relationships, win new 
business and make sure 
we are fairly paid for 
our services. 

•  Driving the generation 
of cash to support 
progressive dividends for 
our shareholders. 

•  Continuing to invest in 
our business and our 
people, through effective 
management of our 
financial resources, 
including a strategic focus 
on costs.

Investing in our business and our people

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  15

Royal Mail plc 

|  Our strategy

Our strategy 

We have a clear vision to be recognised as the best delivery company in the UK and across Europe. 
Our strategy to achieve this leverages our strengths while aiming to deliver sustainable shareholder 
value and our Universal Service commitment. 

Our strategic priorities 

Winning in parcels 

Key initiatives: 

We have maintained our 
pre‑eminent position by 
pursuing faster growing 
parts of the UK parcels 
market while making it 
easier for consumers, 
SMEs and marketplace 
sellers to use Royal Mail 
services. Our investments 
in tracking and automation 
have been key to maintaining 
our position. Through our 
significantly enhanced IT, 
we have the ability to offer 
any retail account customer 
a tracked service. 

•  Delivery confirmation on all barcoded standard parcels 

•  Automated parcels sortation enables us to process small parcels more 

quickly 

•  Growing tracked and return volumes through initiatives and service 

improvements 

•  Working with China Post to provide Chinese and UK customers with faster 

delivery and tracking services 

•  Expanding GLS‑ONE in Germany, enabling customers to create their 

own labels and choose delivery to a specific address, parcel box or GLS 
ParcelShop. GLS Sameday offered in 11 cities 

•  Acquisition of the Spanish express parcels delivery company, ASM 

Defending letters 

Key initiatives: 

Letters are very important to 
our business. They account 
for almost 60 per cent of our 
UK revenue. We continually 
seek to add value to mail 
and increase the efficiency 
and effectiveness of our 
operation. 

•  The Strategic Mailing Partnership™, a joint initiative with the mailing house 

industry, to improve overall efficiency and operational processes 

•  Establishment of new collaborative projects with the advertising industry to 

raise the profile of marketing mail 

•  Working with advertising agencies to sell direct mail alongside other media 

as part of integrated advertising plans 

•  Giving customers incentives to use direct and advertising mail at a 

discount rate 

•  Completing the roll‑out of software upgrades to letters and large letters 

sortation equipment 

Strategic 
priorities, 
enabled  
by...

Growing in new areas 

Key initiatives: 

•  Acquisitions of GSO and Postal Express1, leading regional next‑day parcel 

delivery companies, operating principally on the US west coast 

•  Expanding our relationships with retailers and network partners to stimulate 

cross‑border volumes between the UK and Asia 

•  Developing consumer‑facing products and services that leverage our data, 

brand and relationships 

•  Continuing to roll‑out our UK fleet maintenance services to other businesses, 

employees, friends and family 

We are making the most 
of our existing assets and 
increasing our capability 
through carefully selected 
investments. We want to 
develop a broader revenue 
base and grow in the UK 
and overseas. GLS is well 
positioned to grow in new 
markets and to support the 
Group’s careful and focused 
geographic expansion. We 
are also increasing our digital 
capabilities across the Group, 
particularly in e‑commerce. 

16 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

1  Postal Express was acquired after the financial year end.

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Enabling our strategic priorities 

Strategic focus on costs 

The highly competitive UK parcels 
market, coupled with the ongoing 
structural decline in letters, has 
resulted in increased revenue 
pressures for the Group. Being 
more efficient and controlling our 
costs means we can become more 
competitive, win and retain more 
business and continue to provide 
the best employment terms and 
conditions in the industry. 

Key initiatives: 
•  Improving the efficiency of our logistics network, through the 

use of telemetry 

•  Continuing to progress efficiency opportunities to use shared 
delivery resources for the collection of mail from low volume 
postboxes 

•  Delayering management structures 

•  Reducing road and air routes 

•  Reducing the number of facilities while ensuring we have the 

most accessible Delivery Office network in the UK 

•  Bringing down costs in central functions 

Technology and innovation 

Key initiatives: 

We are harvesting the benefits 
of investments in our technology 
backbone to support our strategic 
priorities to win in parcels, defend 
letters and grow in new areas. 
We are working with partners to 
provide delivery management 
software for international 
parcel shipments, better data 
management and improved 
labelling capabilities. We continue 
to deploy technology to drive 
efficiency and increase the pace of 
change through our operation. 

•  Completed national roll‑out of our new PDA technology in our 

core network 

•  Introduced new functionality to our online postage service Click 
& Drop, making it quicker and easier to buy online postage and 
print address labels 

•  Developing international shipping solutions using the 
cross‑border capabilities of our acquisition, Intersoft 

•  Customers can print delivery and return labels from their mobile 

phones at Customer Service Points 

•  More than eight billion items have now been sent with Mailmark® 

An engaged and motivated workforce 

Key initiatives: 

•  Introduced My Bundle, home of the total reward statement, 

which includes our employees’ flexible benefits range 

•  Initiatives to support women who want to progress their 

careers, including our Springboard programme 

•  More than 70,000 of our people took part in the 

‘Big Conversation’ to identify areas that will make Royal Mail a 
better place to work 

•  Making it easier for our employees to find out what is going on in 
the business through our Royal Mail app, available on all Royal 
Mail and personal devices

Our employees drive the continued 
success of Royal Mail Group. 
We believe good employment 
conditions drive quality of service. 
Our permanent employees are 
paid above the Living Wage, 
which, in turn, is above the legal 
minimum set by the Government. 
They also receive the additional 
benefits associated with permanent 
employment, such as National 
Insurance contributions, paid 
holidays and a good pension. 
This is underpinned by a proactive 
relationship with the unions and 
a strategic focus on efficiency in 
our operations. 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  17

Royal Mail plc 

|  Key performance indicators

Key performance indicators 

The 2016-17 Corporate Balanced Scorecard has been simplified this year to include 10 equal 
measures, all weighted at 10 per cent. The 10 measures alongside the relevant key performance 
indicators (KPIs) are set out below. 

Further details relating to the link between our KPIs and Executive Remuneration, and the 
Corporate Balanced Scorecard for 2017-18, can be found in the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
on page 66. 

Key 

Link to strategy

Winning in parcels

Defending letters 

Target/stretch

Growing in new 
areas 

Threshold

Below threshold 

KPI and strategic link(s)  Measured by

Key activities and achievements in the year

Reduction in road traffic 
collisions (%) 

Reduction in road 
traffic collisions per 
1,000 vehicles1. 

•  This year, we reduced our reported road traffic collisions by 

12.3 per cent 

•  Maintained our Lost Time Accident Frequency Rate (LTAFR) of 0.49 

Employee engagement 
(score) 

First Class Retail Quality 
of Service (%) 

Mean business customer 
satisfaction (score) 

Average score from 
the Ipsos MORI annual 
employee opinion 
survey measuring 
involvement, 
alignment and loyalty 
of colleagues through 
a number of employee 
engagement questions. 

An independent, 
audited measure of 
Quality of Service 
for First Class retail 
products delivered by 
the next working day, 
which may be adjusted 
for force majeure². 

Results from the 
customer satisfaction 
survey completed by 
business customers. 

•  We maintained our employee engagement score of 57 

•  Engaged more than 70,000 colleagues in the Big Conversation 

•  Over 10,000 colleagues participated in our Operations Fundraising 

Challenge 

•  We exceeded the 93.0 per cent First Class mail target 

•  Exceeded 98.5 per cent Second Class mail target 

•  We improved our levels of satisfaction amongst our business customers 

•  Improvements in first time delivery rates through Delivery to Neighbour, 

Safe Place and Work Time Listening and Learning sessions 

Customer complaints 
(‘000) 

Number of complaints 
(not claims) opened 
by our Customer 
Service team. 

•  There was an overall increase in complaints in 2016-17, driven 

principally by the growth in tracked parcels. 

•  We achieved a reduction in two out of our five major categories (redirections 

and misdeliveries) 

Performance  
against target 

2016-17 

Actual: 12.3% 

2015-16: not a KPI 
2014-15: not a KPI 

2016-17 

Actual: 57 

2015-16:  
57 (above target) 
2014-15:  
56 (above target) 

2016-17 

Actual: 93.2% 

2015-16: 92.6% 
(threshold) 
2014-15: 93.1%  
(above target) 

2016-17 

Actual: 78 

2015-16:  
76 (above threshold) 
2014-15:  
76 (stretch) 

2016-17 

Actual: 517 

2015-16:  
476 (below threshold) 
2014-15:  
453 (above target)

1  Added to Corporate Balanced Scorecard in 2016-17. 
2  This accounts for the impact of factors which are beyond Royal Mail’s control, such as weather.

18 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

KPI and strategic link(s) Measured by

Key activities and achievements in the year

Productivity for 
collections, processing 
and delivery (%) 

UKPIL costs (£m)3,4 

Group revenue (£m)4 

Group operating profit 
before transformation 
costs (£m)4 

In-year trading cash 
flow (£m) 

Percentage change 
year-on-year in the 
number of weighted 
items per gross 
hour paid in Delivery 
Units and Mail Centre 
Units (delivery and 
processing, including 
regional logistics 
and collections) and 
Regional Distribution 
Centres. 

Adjusted operating 
costs for UKPIL. 

Group revenue 
adjusted for budgeted 
foreign exchange rate 
and the impact of GLS 
acquistitions. 

Adjusted Group 
operating profit before 
transformation costs, 
adjusted for budgeted 
foreign exchange rate 
and the impact of GLS 
acquistitions. 

In-year trading cash 
flow before cash flows 
relating to London 
development property 
portfolio. 

•  An improvement in productivity was achieved through a reduction in 

frontline hours despite an increase in workload 

•  Total UKPIL costs reduced by one per cent

•  Group revenue was up one per cent 

•  Revenue growth in GLS more than offset a decline in UKPIL revenue 

•  Adjusted Group operating profit before transformation costs decreased

In-year trading cash flow was £420 million

Performance
against target

2016-17 

Actual: 2.7% 

2015-16:  
2.4% (above target) 
2014-15:  
2.5% (above target) 

2016-17 

Actual: £7,082m 

2015-16: not a KPI 
2014-15: not a KPI 

2016-17 

Actual: £9,455m 

2015-16: 
£9,191m5 (above target) 
2014-15:  
£9,556m5 (above 
threshold) 

2016-17 

Actual: £701m 

2015-16:  
£738m5 (above target) 
2014-15:  
£620m5 (target) 

2016-17 

Actual: £420m 

2015-16: not a KPI 
2014-15: not a KPI

3  Added to Corporate Balanced Scorecard in 2016-17. 
4  Reported results are adjusted to reflect a constant foreign exchange rate of £1/€1.3 in GLS. Adjustments are also made to remove the impact of GLS acquisitions in the year and 

the underlying inpact of weaker £ Sterling in UKPIL. 

5  Prior year results are on a reported basis, adjusted for budgeted foreign exchange rate.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  19

Royal Mail plc 

|  Key performance indicators

Adding value and 
convenient services 

What we have done... 

Improved tracked and 
return volumes through  
initiatives and service 
improvements 

GLS SameDay  
offering same day 
evening deliveries  
in 11 cities 

Launched Labels to Go 

Completed PDA roll-out  
in our core network 

Delivery confirmation 
available on all 
barcoded parcels 

Improved service 
and systems for 
international 
shipments 

What’s in our plan... 

Parcels automation live 
and rolling-out to  
further sites 

Increasing the number 
of parcels we track 

Careful and focused 
geographic expansion 
through GLS 

Expanding our 
relationships with 
retailers and network 
partners to stimulate 
cross-border volumes 
between the UK  
and Asia

20 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Financial review 

Reported results and Alternative Performance Measures (APMs) 
Reported results are prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). 

In addition to reported results, the Group’s performance in this Financial Review and throughout this Annual Report and Financial Statements is 
also explained through the use of APMs that are not defined under IFRS. These APMs relate to adjusted results and movements on an underlying 
basis. Management are of the view that these measures provide a more meaningful basis on which to analyse business performance and are 
consistent with the way that financial performance is measured by Management and reported to the Board. 

These APMs are explained in detail on pages 33 to 36 and include reconciliations to the closest measure prescribed under IFRS where 
appropriate. The analysis of underlying movements in adjusted results is set out at the end of the Financial Review. Following the publication 
of an amendment to IAS 1, the Group no longer shows non-IFRS adjustments on the face of its income statement. 

UK Parcels, International & Letters (UKPIL) 

Summary trading results (£m) 

Letters and other revenue

Marketing mail

Total letters

Parcels

Revenue2

Operating costs before transformation costs

Operating profit before transformation costs

Transformation costs

Operating profit after transformation costs

Margin

Volumes (m) 

Letters 

Addressed letters

Unaddressed letters

Parcels 

Core network

Parcelforce Worldwide

Total

Adjusted 
52 weeks ended 
26 March 2017 

Re-presented1 
52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 

Underlying 
change 

3,234

1,087

4,321

3,337

7,658

(7,110)

548

(137)

411

5.4%

11,922

2,934

1,073

96

1,169

3,299

1,176

4,475

3,196

7,671

(7,046)

625

(191) 

434

5.7%

12,563

2,993

1,034

96

1,130

(3%) 

(8%) 

(5%) 

3% 

(2%) 

(1%) 

(11%) 

(4%) 

(10bps) 

(6%) 

(3%) 

3% 

(1%) 

3% 

Reported results 
UKPIL revenue decreased to £7,658 million (2015-16: £7,671 million). Operating costs before transformation costs increased to £7,332 million 
(2015-16: £7,303 million). UKPIL operating profit before transformation costs decreased to £326 million (2015-16: £368 million) and operating 
profit after transformation costs increased to £189 million (2015-16: £177 million). 

Adjusted results 
UKPIL revenue declined by two per cent, with parcel revenue up three per cent and total letter revenue down five per cent. Weaker Sterling had 
a positive impact of £28 million on UKPIL revenue. This has been excluded from underlying movements. 

Total parcel volumes increased by three per cent, with growth largely driven by Royal Mail account parcels. Account parcel volumes, excluding 
Amazon, grew by four per cent. In the consumer channel, we saw improving trends in volume and revenue. The weakening of Sterling has 
impacted our international parcel volumes. The rate of growth of import volumes slowed compared to last year. We undertook a number 

1  Following the Group’s acquisition of the remaining 49 per cent shareholding in Romec Limited (Romec) at the beginning of 2016-17, Romec has been consolidated into the UKPIL 

segment (previously the Group’s 51 per cent shareholding was reported within 'Other' segment). The 2015-16 UKPIL results have been re-presented to reflect this change. 
2  Stamped, metered and other prepaid revenue channels are subject to statistical sampling surveys to derive the revenue relating to parcels, marketing mail and letters. These 
surveys are subject to continuous refinement, which may over time reallocate revenue between the products above, and which may occasionally lead to a consequent change 
to this estimate.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  21

Royal Mail plc 

|  UK Parcels, International & Letters (UKPIL)

of initiatives, including working to improve the UK delivery service with China Post which improved import AURs and revenue. Export volumes 
declined for the year overall but grew in the second half. Total parcel revenue was up three per cent. 

Addressed letter volumes declined by six per cent (excluding the impact of political parties’ election mailings), at the higher end of our forecast 
range of decline of four to six per cent per annum. This reflected the levels of business uncertainty following the EU Referendum and a strong 
prior year which saw a one-off return of direct delivery volumes. Total letter revenue (including marketing mail) decreased by five per cent 
reflecting the impact of low inflation on pricing and declines in volumes across all main letter products. 

The methodology used to estimate the value of marketing mail revenue was refined during the year. The prior year estimate for marketing mail 
revenue has been re-presented to reflect the change in methodology resulting in a reallocation of £18 million of revenue from 'Letters and other' 
to 'Marketing mail' revenue. 

Marketing mail revenue, which includes our data businesses, declined by eight per cent. There was a slowdown in marketing activity over the 
year reflecting a softening in economic conditions. Low AUR unaddressed letter volumes were down three per cent. 

Revenue from election mailings relating to the EU Referendum was in line with that in the prior year relating to the 2015 General Election. We are 
expecting revenue from election mailings relating to the General Election called for June 2017. Given the short run-up, it is likely to be lower 
than in 2016-17. 

UKPIL's performance in the first half of 2017-18 will be impacted by the phasing of performance over the prior year. In particular, letters 
performance in the first quarter of 2017-18 may look relatively weak given the strong comparative quarter last year (Q1 2016-17: Addressed 
letter volume two per cent decline). 

Operating costs before transformation costs 

(£m) 

People costs

Non-people costs

Distribution and conveyance costs

Infrastructure costs

Other operating costs

Total

Adjusted 
52 weeks ended 
26 March 2017 

Re-presented1 
52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 

Underlying 
change 

(4,865)

(2,245)

(828)

(740)

(677)

(7,110)

(4,841)

(2,205)

(776)

(749)

(680)

(7,046)

(1%) 

Flat 

1% 

(1%) 

Flat 

(1%) 

Total adjusted operating costs before transformation costs were down one per cent on an underlying basis, reflecting a better performance in the second 
half. Our cost avoidance programme in UKPIL delivered £225 million costs avoided in the year, comprising people costs of £132 million and non-people 
costs of £93 million. We have delivered benefits across a number of initiatives during the year, including reducing layers in our management structures 
within operations, better vehicle utilisation, transformation of our IT infrastructure and lower property costs. 

As previously disclosed, as a result of the new single-tier state pension scheme introduced in April 2016, the Group saw an increase in its employer 
National Insurance contributions for employees participating in the RMPP of £65 million in the year. This has been excluded from underlying movements. 

People costs declined by one per cent, largely driven by a 2.7 per cent improvement in collections, processing and delivery productivity in the core 
network. This more than offset pay increases, largely the 1.6 per cent frontline pay award. The improvement in productivity was achieved through 
a 1.9 per cent reduction in core network hours, coupled with the absorption of a higher workload. The higher workload was driven by an increase 
in tracked products which more than offset the impact of declining letter volumes. We continue to target annual productivity improvements 
of 2.0-3.0 per cent per annum. 

As previously disclosed, wage legislation such as the Working Time Directive, Apprentice Levy and increased costs relating to redundancy 
payments will impact people costs in the future. The impact of the Apprentice Levy for 2017-18 is expected to be around £20 million. We would 
expect to exclude the first year impact of such legislative changes from underlying movements if material. 

Non-people costs were flat. Distribution and conveyance costs increased by one per cent, driven by increases in the cost of sales related to the 
international business. Terminal dues increased by £62 million, of which £37 million reflects weaker Sterling and has been excluded from underlying 
movements. The remaining £25 million of the increase reflects the mix of export parcels revenue. This trend is expected to continue next year. In addition, 
we have seen increased costs associated with handling tracked volumes and larger parcels and we expect this to continue. Total diesel and jet fuel costs 
of £159 million were £13 million lower than the prior year due to lower pricing and improved fleet management. We expect diesel and jet fuel costs to be 
around £140 million in 2017-18. 

Infrastructure costs were down one per cent with benefits from our cost avoidance programme more than offsetting the increase in depreciation 
and amortisation of around £20 million, due to parcels systems and tracking investments coming into use. Within infrastructure costs, the cost 
avoidance programme has delivered benefits in property through the integration of Romec, IT transformation and lower discretionary spend 
across the entire estate. Over the past five years, we have invested significantly in IT and other assets as part of the transformation programme. 
As a result, the depreciation and amortisation charge is expected to increase by a further £30 million in 2017-18 but should stabilise thereafter. 

Other operating costs were flat, with the increased cost of marketing and other spend in our new business areas being offset by activity within 
the cost avoidance programme, including lower discretionary spend.

22 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

We remain on track to avoid annualised operating costs of around £600 million by 2017-18. However, there remain cost pressures, in particular, 
the next pay deal and increased depreciation. 

Transformation costs 

(£m) 

Voluntary redundancy

Project costs

Business transformation payments

Total

Adjusted 
52 weeks ended 
26 March 2017 

Adjusted 
52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 

(62)

(75)

–

(137)

(117) 

(72) 

(2) 

(191) 

Transformation costs were £137 million, at the lower end of our range of £130 to £160 million due to a change in mix of activity within the cost 
avoidance programme. There was a net decrease of around 730 employees in UKPIL in the year. However, there was a reduction of around 
3,500 full time equivalent employees (FTEs)3 to 148,170 FTEs reflecting a change in the mix of full-time and part-time employees and a reduction 
in variable hours. Project costs were £75 million, largely relating to projects supporting the cost avoidance programme. 

We expect transformation costs to be in the range £130 to £150 million per annum going forward. 

Operating profit after transformation costs 
Adjusted operating profit after transformation costs was £411 million, giving a margin of 5.4 per cent, down 10 basis points on an 
underlying basis. 

3  Full time equivalent (FTE) numbers relate to the total number of paid hours (including part-time, full-time and agency hours) divided by the standard full-time working hours 

in the same period.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  23

Royal Mail plc 

|  General Logistics Systems (GLS)

General Logistics Systems (GLS) 

Reported results 
The tables below reflect the reported Euro results. Underlying change excludes the impact of acquisitions. 

Summary trading results (continuing operations) (€m) 

Revenue

Operating costs

Operating profit

Margin

(£m) 

Revenue

Operating costs

Operating profit

Volumes (m)

Reported 
Year ended 
March 2017 

Reported 
Year ended 
March 2016 

2,521

(2,325)

196

7.8%

2,118

(1,954)

164

508

2,158

(1,998)

160

7.4%

1,580 

(1,463) 

117 

431

Underlying 
change 

9% 

9% 

17% 

50bps 

9% 

Revenue and volumes 
GLS continued to perform well. Performance in the period benefited from the timing of Easter and other public holidays across Europe, which is 
estimated to have accounted for around two percentage points of the volume and revenue underlying change. Volumes were up nine per cent, 
with continued strong growth in international volumes. Revenue increased by nine per cent, as pricing was impacted by lower average parcel 
weights. Revenue in Sterling terms benefited from a £233 million impact from exchange rate movements which is excluded from underlying 
movements. Revenue growth was achieved in almost all markets and from a broad customer base, with the largest customer accounting for 
around two per cent of total GLS revenue. The three major markets, Germany, Italy and France, accounted for 63 per cent of total GLS revenue 
down from 68 per cent in 2015-16 reflecting the impact of the acquisitions in Spain and the US. 

In 2017-18, the timing of public holidays across Europe is expected to have the effect of reducing underlying revenue and volume movements 
by around two percentage points compared with 2016-17. 

Operating costs (€m) 

People costs

Non-people costs

Distribution and conveyance costs

Infrastructure costs

Other operating costs

Total

Reported 
Year ended 
March 2017 

Reported 
Year ended 
March 2016 

Underlying 
change 

 (582)

 (1,743)

 (1,521)

(152) 

(70) 

(2,325) 

(489)

(1,509)

(1,312)

(143)

(54)

(1,998)

8% 

9% 

10% 

Flat 

11% 

9% 

Total operating costs were up nine per cent in line with volume. 

People costs increased by eight per cent as a result of increased semi-variable costs linked to volume and increases in rates of pay. Distribution 
and conveyance costs were up ten per cent, driven by higher volumes. Infrastructure costs were flat, with a one-off provision release of €3 million 
for IT related costs offsetting inflationary pressures. Other operating costs increased by 11 per cent, partly driven by costs associated with our 
geographic expansion activities. The prior year benefited from a one-off provision release of around €3 million. 

Operating profit 
Operating profit was €196 million giving a reported margin of 7.8 per cent. This represents an underlying margin improvement of 50 basis points 
over the prior year. This performance was largely due to improved profitability in Italy, Germany and France. Reported profit in Sterling terms 
benefited from an £18 million impact from exchange rate movements which is excluded from underlying movements. 

Germany 
Germany remains the largest market for GLS by revenue. Revenue in GLS Germany grew by five per cent, driven by international volumes 
and improved domestic pricing. Profitability has been impacted by legislation which increased the minimum wage by four per cent from 
1 January 2017. This has increased costs in the period by €1 million with an estimated twelve month impact of €5 million.

24 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Italy 
GLS Italy continues to perform strongly. Revenue growth of 13 per cent was due to strong B2C volume growth, driven by Amazon and other 
customers. Given the strong performance over the last two years, it will be challenging to maintain this rate of growth in the future. 

France 
GLS France delivered an improved rate of revenue growth of eight per cent, largely from domestic volumes. Reported operating losses reduced 
by €5 million to €8 million. France remains a challenging market and while actions are underway which target a break-even result, higher costs 
of sale including those associated with a changing mix of parcel sizes means that it is unlikely we will achieve this in the short term. 

Other developed European markets (including Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Ireland, Netherlands, Portugal and Spain) 
Revenue growth was achieved in the majority of other developed European markets with strong growth in Denmark. In June 2016, we 
announced the acquisition of ASM for a total consideration (including debt taken on) of €71 million. ASM has exceeded performance expectations 
since acquisition. Given the potential synergies, the transaction is expected to be economic profit accretive for GLS in 2018-19. 

Other developing/emerging European markets (including Croatia, Czech Republic, Hungary, Poland, Romania, Slovakia and Slovenia) 
We saw revenue growth in all developing/emerging European markets, with particularly strong growth in Romania. This has been largely driven 
by the growing parcels markets in these countries. 

USA 
On 4 October 2016, we announced the acquisition of GSO, a regional next day parcel delivery company operating primarily in California, for 
a total consideration of $90 million. We expect GSO to perform in line with our expectations in the first full year of its ownership by the Group. 
The transaction is expected to be economic profit accretive for GLS in 2019-20. 

On 6 April 2017, we announced the acquisition of Postal Express, a regional overnight parcel carrier operating in the states of Washington, 
Oregon and Idaho for a total consideration of $13.3 million. Postal Express offers overnight parcel delivery, mainly to B2B customers, across 
a number of industries. The transaction is expected to be economic profit accretive for GLS in 2018-19. 

GSO and Postal Express will be operated as standalone businesses but will be incorporated into the results of GLS.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  25

Royal Mail plc 

|  Group results

Group results 

Reported results 
Group revenue increased to £9,776 million (2015-16: £9,251 million). Operating costs before transformation costs increased to £9,286 million 
(2015-16: £8,766 million). Group operating profit before transformation costs increased to £490 million (2015-16: £485 million). Operating 
profit after transformation costs increased to £353 million (2015-16: £294 million). Operating specific items decreased to £134 million 
(2015-16: £156 million). As a result, Group operating profit was £219 million (2015-16: £138 million). Profit before tax from continuing operations 
increased to £335 million (2015-16: £267 million), of which, UKPIL accounted for £183 million (2015-16: £150 million) and GLS accounted for 
£152 million (2015-16: £117 million). Earnings per share from continuing operations increased from 21.5 pence to 27.5 pence. 

There is a full reconciliation of reported to adjusted results set out on page 34. 

Adjusted results 

Group revenue 

(£m) 

UKPIL

GLS

Total

Adjusted 
52 weeks ended 
26 March 2017 

Re-presented1 
52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 

7,658

2,118

9,776

7,671

1,580

9,251

Underlying 
change 

(2%) 

9% 

1% 

Parcel revenue accounted for 56 per cent of Group revenue (2015-16: 52 per cent). The main factors impacting revenue in the year are described 
in the sections entitled ‘UK Parcels, International & Letters (UKPIL)’ and ‘General Logistics Systems (GLS)’. 

Group operating costs 

(£m) 

People costs

Non-people costs

Distribution and conveyance costs

Infrastructure costs

Other operating costs

Total

Adjusted 
52 weeks ended 
26 March 2017 

Re-presented1  
52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 

Underlying 
change 

(5,354)

(3,710)

(2,106)

(868)

(736)

(9,064)

(5,199)

(3,310)

(1,736)

(854)

(720)

(8,509)

Flat 

3% 

6% 

(1%) 

Flat 

1% 

Group operating costs increased by one per cent due to increases at GLS. The main factors impacting operating costs in the year are described in 
the sections entitled ‘UK Parcels, International & Letters (UKPIL)’ and ‘General Logistics Systems (GLS)’. 

Group operating profit after transformation costs 

(£m) 

UKPIL

GLS

Total

Margin

Adjusted 
52 weeks ended 
26 March 2017 

Re-presented1  
52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 

411

164

575

5.9%

434 

117 

551 

6.0% 

Lower transformation costs in UKPIL led to Group operating profit margin after transformation costs increasing by 10 basis points on an 
underlying basis to 5.9 per cent.

1  Following the Group’s acquisition of the remaining 49 per cent shareholding in Romec Limited (Romec) at the beginning of 2016-17, Romec has been consolidated into the UKPIL 

segment (previously the Group’s 51 per cent shareholding was reported within 'Other' segment). The 2015-16 UKPIL results have been re-presented to reflect this change.

26 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Specific items and pension charge to cash difference adjustment 

(£m) 

Pension charge to cash difference adjustment (within People costs)

Operating specific items 

Employee Free Shares charge

Amortisation of acquired intangible assets

Legacy/other (costs)/credit

Potential industrial diseases claims

Personal injury provision discount rate decrease

Other

Total operating specific items and pensions adjustment

Non-operating specific items 

Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Loss on disposal of business

Net pension interest

Profit on disposal of discontinued operations

Total non-operating specific items

Total specific items and pensions adjustment before tax

Total tax credit on specific items and pensions adjustment

52 weeks ended 
26 March 2017 

52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 

(222)

(105)

(11)

(18)

(6)

(4)

(8)

(356)

14

(2)

120

–

132

(224)

59

(257) 

(158) 

– 

2 

3 

– 

(1) 

(413) 

29 

– 

113 

31 

173 

(240) 

68 

The pension charge to cash difference adjustment was £222 million (2015-16: £257 million). The difference between the pension charge and cash 
cost largely comprises the difference between the IAS 19 income statement pension charge rate of 28.8 per cent and the actual cash payments 
agreed with the RMPP Trustee of 17.1 per cent. The IAS 19 pension service charge rate for 2017-18 is projected to significantly increase to 
41.1 per cent as a result of the reduction in corporate bond yields which means that the pension charge to cash difference adjustment for 
2017-18 is expected to increase to around £440 million. 

Operating specific items in the year related mainly to the Employee Free Shares charge of £105 million (2015-16: £158 million). The Employee 
Free Shares charge has decreased as a result of SIP 2013 maturing in October 2016. This has been partially offset by the charge in relation to 
the Free Shares awarded in October 2015 (SIP 2015) and October 2016 (SIP 2016). The charge for Employee Free Shares will reduce over time 
reflecting the phasing of the charge over the vesting period. For 2017-18, the Employee Free Shares charge is expected to be around £40 million. 

Amortisation of acquired intangibles of £11 million reflects the amortisation of goodwill relating largely to ASM and GSO. 

The increase in the provision for legacy costs is driven by a reduction in the discount rate used to calculate the industrial diseases provision and 
the legislative decrease in discount rate used to determine personal injury claims announced in February 2017. Other specific items mainly relate 
to the integration of Romec into the Group. 

Non-operating specific items include a profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment of £14 million (2015-16: £29 million). This mainly 
arises from the sale of a GLS property in Munich and the Maidstone Delivery Office. The loss on disposal of business relates to the sale of 
NDC 2000 Limited (NDC) and reflects the transfer of cash and other assets to the purchasers. The net pension interest credit was £120 million 
(2015-16: £113 million), higher than the prior year due to the increase in the accounting surplus at 27 March 2016. The net pension interest is 
expected to be £91 million in 2017-18, due to the lower discount rate more than offsetting the impact of the increased surplus. 

Net finance costs 
Reported net finance costs were £16 million compared with £13 million in the prior year. Interest on the €500 million bond was £11 million, 
£2 million higher than the prior year as a result of weaker Sterling. 

Facility

€500 million bond

Loans in GLS (Spain)

Revolving credit facility

Total

Rate 

2.5%

2.0%

LIBOR+0.55%

Facility 
(£m) 

430

1

1,050

1,481

Drawn 
(£m)

430

1

32

463 

Facility end date 

2024 

2017 

2020-22 

The blended interest rate on gross debt, including finance leases for 2017-18, is expected to be approximately three per cent. The retranslation 
impact of the €500 million bond is accounted for within equity.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  27

Royal Mail plc 

|  Group results

Taxation 

(£m) 

Reported 

Profit before tax

Tax charge

Effective tax rate

Adjusted 

Profit before tax

Tax charge

Effective tax rate

52 weeks ended 
26 March 2017 

UK

GLS

Group

183

(20)

11%

398

(76)

19%

152

(42)

28%

161

(45)

28%

335

(62)

19%

559

(121)

22%

52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 

GLS

Group 

117

(31)

26%

117

(34)

29%

267 

(45) 

17% 

538 

(118) 

22% 

UK

150

(14)

9%

421

(84)

20%

The Group effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax was 22 per cent. The UK adjusted effective tax rate of 19 per cent is broadly in line with 
the UK statutory tax rate. GLS’ effective tax rate of 28 per cent has reduced due to lower French losses for which no deferred tax is recognised 
and increased notional interest deductions in Italy. 

In the UK, the reported effective tax rate is lower than the adjusted effective tax rate as the impact of the one-off deferred tax credit due to a 
reduction in future corporation tax rate is treated as a specific item and excluded from the adjusted tax result. Additionally, tax associated with 
property disposal profits within the reported result is offset by reinvestment relief contributing to the lower reported effective tax rate. 

Earnings per share (EPS) 
Adjusted basic EPS for continuing operations was 44.1 pence compared with 41.3 pence in the prior year, largely reflecting the decrease in 
transformation costs. 

In-year trading cash flow 

(£m) 

EBITDA before transformation costs

Pension charge to cash difference adjustment

Adjusted EBITDA before transformation costs

Trading working capital movements

Share-based awards (SAYE and LTIP) charge

Dividends received from associate

Total investment

Income tax paid

Net finance costs paid

Total

52 weeks ended  
26 March 2017 

52 weeks ended  
27 March 2016 

793

222

1,015

(3)

11

–

(529)

(60)

(14)

420

756 

257 

1,013 

(26) 

13 

1 

(694) 

(40) 

(13) 

254 

In-year trading cash flow inflow was £420 million, £166 million higher than the prior year, mainly driven by lower investment spend and lower 
trading working capital absorption. Adjusted EBITDA before transformation costs was broadly flat, as higher EBITDA was offset by the lower 
pension charge to cash difference adjustment. Trading working capital outflow was £3 million, an improvement of £23 million compared with 
the prior year due to a change in international sales mix. Income tax paid was £60 million, £20 million higher than the prior year mainly due to a 
repayment received in the prior year and tax paid this year on the sale of DPD SL. 

On a cash tax basis, in the UK, we continue to be able to offset the majority of taxable profits with capital allowances and brought forward losses. 
UK cash tax paid is now expected to stay at similar levels until 2019-20 due to research and development credits and patent box tax reliefs, and 
normalise thereafter.

28 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Net cash investment 

(£m) 

Growth capital expenditure

Replacement capital expenditure

Transformation operating expenditure

Voluntary redundancy

Project costs

Business transformation payments

Total investment

Proceeds from disposal of property (excluding London property portfolio), plant and equipment

Total

52 weeks ended  
26 March 2017 

52 weeks ended  
27 March 2016 

(208)

(179)

(142)

(66)

(76)

–

(529)

37

(492)

(253) 

(208) 

(233) 

(159) 

(72) 

(2) 

(694) 

38 

(656) 

Total gross cash investment decreased from £694 million to £529 million, due to lower spend in relation to voluntary redundancy payments and 
more efficient investment spend. Total gross investment was skewed towards growth capital expenditure of which parcels automation, parcel 
systems, PDA initiatives and investment in GLS represented the majority of spend in the year. Replacement capital expenditure reduced by £29 
million, due to the timing of ongoing property maintenance and lower spending on certain property and technology projects. Both growth and 
replacement capital expenditure have reduced in 2016-17. 

We are past the peak of investment and are targeting net cash investment of around £450 million in 2017-18 and less than £500 million per 
annum going forward. 

Net debt 
Net debt was £338 million at 26 March 2017, £114 million higher than at 27 March 2016. 

A reconciliation of net debt is set out below. 

(£m) 

Net debt brought forward at 27 March 2016 and 29 March 2015

In-year trading cash inflow

Other working capital movements

Cash cost of operating specific items

Proceeds from disposal of property (excluding London property portfolio), 
plant and equipment

Cash impact of disposal of discontinued operations and subsidiary

Acquisition of business interests

Cash flows relating to London property portfolio

Debt transferred on acquisitions

Purchase of own shares

Foreign currency exchange impact

Dividends paid to equity holders of the parent Company

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests

Net debt carried forward

420

(6)

(61)

37

(3)

(144)

(34)

(10)

(53)

(30)

(222)

(8)

52 weeks ended 
26 March 2017 

(224)

52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 

(275) 

254 

6 

(6) 

38 

41 

(18) 

(23) 

– 

– 

(21) 

(213) 

(7) 

(338)

(224) 

Movements in GLS client cash are included within other working capital movements. The amount held at 26 March 2017 was £22 million. 

The cash cost of operating specific items largely related to the French Competition Authority fine of €55 million that was paid in April 2016. 
Property disposal proceeds of £37 million largely relate to the sale of a GLS property in Munich and the Maidstone Delivery Office.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  29

 
Royal Mail plc 

|  Group results

A reconciliation of cash flows relating to acquisitions is shown below. 

(£m) 

GSO

ASM

Other

Total consideration (see Note 10)

Add back net cash acquired on acquisition of business

Acquisition of business interests, net of cash acquired (see statutory cash flow statement)

Deferred consideration paid in respect of prior years' acquisitions

Acquisition of non-controlling interests

Acquisition of business interests

52 weeks ended 
26 March 
2017 

(66) 

(49) 

(11) 

(126) 

4 

(122) 

(4) 

(18) 

(144) 

Other acquisitions included eCourier. The acquisition of non-controlling interests represents the purchase of the remaining 49 per cent of Romec. 

Debt transferred on acquisitions includes £3 million of finance leases and £7 million of interest bearing loans and borrowings on GLS acquisitions. 

Cash outflows relating to the London property portfolio of £34 million largely relate to remediation work, reprovisioning costs and planning and 
marketing costs in relation to the Nine Elms and Mount Pleasant sites. These sites, in particular Mount Pleasant, will require further investment 
once sales proceeds are received. Both sites continue to be marketed. 

Approach to capital management 
The Group has established four key objectives for capital management. 

Objectives

Enablers

2016-17 Update 

Meet the Group’s obligations as they fall due  By maintaining sufficient cash reserves and committed 

facilities to – 

•  meet all obligations, including pensions; and 

•  manage future risks, including those set out in the Principal 

Risks section on pages 37 to 41 

Support a progressive dividend policy

Generate sufficient in-year trading cash flow to cover the 
ordinary dividend and maintain sufficient distributable 
reserves to sustain the Group’s dividend policy 

At 26 March 2017, the Group had available resources of 
£1,317 million (2015-16: £1,418 million); made up of cash and 
cash equivalents of £299 million (2015-16: £368 million) and 
undrawn committed revolving credit facilities of £1,018 million 
(2015-16: £1,050 million) 

The Group met the loan covenants and other obligations for its 
revolving credit facility and €500 million bond, (see Note 20) 

As set out in the Viability Statement, the Directors have a 
reasonable expectation that the Group will continue to meet its 
obligations as they fall due 

Generated £420 million of in-year trading cash flow (2015-16: 
£254 million) to cover the full year dividend of 23.0 pence 
per share (2015-16: 22.1 pence per share) equivalent to 
£230 million 

Capital managed by the Group excluding the net assets of the 
pension scheme is £1,806 million (2015-16: £1,602 million)2 

The Group had retained earnings of £4,940 million at 26 March 
2017 (2015-16: £4,451 million). The Group considers it has a 
maximum level of distributable reserves of around £2 billion 
which excludes the impact of the pension surplus on retained 
earnings, more than sufficient to cover the dividend 

Reduce the cost of capital for the Group

Target investment grade standard credit metrics i.e. no lower 
than BBB- under Standard & Poor’s rating methodology 

During the year, the Group maintained a credit rating of BBB 
with a stable outlook from Standard & Poor’s 

Retain sufficient flexibility to invest in the 
future of the business 

Funded by retained cash flows and manageable levels of debt 
consistent with our target credit rating 

During the year, the Group made total gross investments of 
£529 million (2015-16: £694 million) and acquisition of business 
interests of £144 million (2015-16: £18 million) while retaining 
sufficient capital headroom 

Pensions 
The Company’s overall IAS 19 pension position at 26 March 2017 was a surplus of £3,839 million, compared with a surplus of £3,430 million 
at 27 March 2016. The IAS 19 accounting position and key assumptions for the valuation are provided in Note 9 to the consolidated 
financial statements.

2  At 26 March 2017 consists of net assets (comprising of investment balances, working capital, provisions and net debt) of £4,998 million (2015-16: £4,467 million), less pension 

assets of £3,839 million (2015-16: £3,430 million), with the associated deferred tax liability on pension assets of £647 million credited back (2015-16: £565 million).

30 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

The accounting liabilities have increased over the year due to the fall in corporate bond yields. This has been offset by the increase in the RMPP 
assets, largely due to the hedging strategy adopted by the RMPP. 

Royal Mail Pension Plan (RMPP) 
The triennial valuation of RMPP at 31 March 2015 was agreed on 8 May 2017. Based on this set of assumptions, the RMPP actuarial 
surplus at 31 March 2017 was estimated to be £1,074 million, comprising of assets of £9,603 million and liabilities of £8,529 million 
(2015-16: £1,765 million). 

Using these assumptions, the projected cost of benefits being accrued each year, based on market conditions at the end of March 2017, would 
currently be around £1,260 million. This is significantly greater than projected 2017-18 contributions of £320 million by the Company and 
£110 million by employees. Accordingly, we expect that the actuarial funding surplus would be exhausted during 2018 if the RMPP had remained 
open in its current form. 

Following the Company’s decision the RMPP will close to future accrual on 31 March 2018. 

In accordance with the new Schedule of Contributions, the service contribution rate for 2017-18 will remain at 17.1 per cent. The March 2015 
valuation continues to show the scheme in surplus and therefore no deficit correction payments are expected to be made. 

Royal Mail Senior Executives Pension Plan (RMSEPP) 
The RMSEPP triennial valuation at 31 March 2015 has been completed, based on the assumptions agreed as part of the Funding Agreement 
made between the Company and the Trustees in 2013. On this basis, the actuarial surplus was £16 million at 31 March 2015 comprising assets 
of £410 million and liabilities of £394 million. 

The RMSEPP closed in December 2012 to future accrual. Therefore the Company makes no regular future service contributions. As agreed in the 
February 2013 Funding Agreement with the Trustees, the Company makes deficit correction payments of £10 million per annum until at least the 
date on which the March 2018 valuation is completed (no later than 30 September 2018). 

Dividends 
The final dividend of 15.1 pence per ordinary share in respect of the 2015-16 financial year was paid on 29 July 2016, following 
shareholder approval. 

The interim dividend of 7.4 pence per ordinary share in respect of the 2016-17 financial year was paid on 11 January 2017 to shareholders on the 
register at the close of business on 9 December 2016. 

The Board is recommending a final dividend of 15.6 pence per ordinary share, payable on 28 July 2017 to shareholders on the register at the 
close of business on 30 June 2017, subject to shareholder approval at the AGM on 20 July 2017. This gives a total dividend for the year of 
23.0 pence. 

As previously stated, given the seasonality of the Group’s business, the Board would expect to pay an interim dividend each year equal to 
approximately one-third of the prior year’s total dividend and to set the final dividend for each year in light of the full year performance of 
the Group. 

Financial risks and related hedging 
The Group is exposed to commodity and currency price risk. The Group operates hedging policies which are described in the Notes to the Annual 
Report and Financial Statements in 2016-17. 

The forecast diesel and jet commodity exposures in UKPIL are set out below together with the sensitivity of 2017-18 operating profit to changes 
in commodity prices and fuel duty. 

2017-18 Exposure 

Diesel

Jet

Total

Forecast total 
cost 
£m 

134

8

142

Fuel duty/ 
other costs (incl 
irrecoverable 
VAT) – not 
hedged 
2017-18  
£m 

Underlying 
commodity 
exposure (incl 
irrecoverable 
VAT) 
2017-18  
£m 

Underlying 
commodity 
volume hedged 
% 

Residual 
unhedged 
underlying 
commodity 
exposure (incl 
irrecoverable 
VAT) 
£m 

Impact on 
2017-18 
operating profit 
of a further 
10% increase 
in commodity 
price 
£m 

Impact on 
2017-18 
operating profit 
of a further 
10% increase in 
fuel duty/other 
cost 
£m 

92

3

95

42

5

47

94

79

92

3

1

4

–

–

–

(9) 

– 

(9) 

As a result of hedging, it is anticipated that the diesel commodity cost for 2017-18 will reduce by £10 million. Without hedging, the cost reduction 
would have been £12 million (based upon closing fuel prices at 26 March 2017).

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  31

Royal Mail plc 

|  Group results

The Group is exposed to foreign currency risk due to interest payments on the €500 million bond, certain obligations under Euro denominated 
finance leases, trading with overseas postal administrations and various purchase contracts denominated in foreign currency. GLS’ functional 
currency is the Euro which results in translational exposure to the Group’s operating profit. 

The average exchange rate between Sterling and the Euro was £1/€1.19, representing a 13 per cent weakening in Sterling compared with 
£1/€1.37 in 2015-16, which resulted in an £18 million increase in GLS’ reported operating profit before tax in 2016-17. This weakness of Sterling 
resulted in lower UKPIL operating profit of £9 million in the international business. The net impact on Group operating profit before tax was 
therefore £9 million. 

The Group manages its interest rate risk through a combination of fixed rate loans and leasing, floating rate loans/facilities and floating rate 
financial investments. At 26 March 2017, all of the gross debt of £657 million was at fixed rates to maturity. 

Counterparty risk is managed by limiting aggregate exposure to any individual counterparty based on their financial strength. 

Events after the reporting year 
Acquisition of Postal Express 
On 6 April 2017, we announced the acquisition of Postal Express for $13.3 million. Operating in the states of Washington, Oregon and Idaho 
Postal Express offers overnight parcel delivery services, mainly to B2B customers, across a number of industries. 

Closure of Royal Mail Pension Plan (RMPP) 
On 8 May 2017, the Company and the RMPP Trustee agreed the March 2015 actuarial valuation and revised Schedule of Contributions following 
the decision to close the RMPP to future accrual from 31 March 2018.

32 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Presentation of results and Alternative Performance 
Measures (APMs) 

In its financial reporting, the Group uses certain measures that are not defined under International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), the 
Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) under which the Group produces its statutory financial information. These APMs are not a 
substitute, or superior to, any IFRS measures of performance. They are used as Management considers them to be an important means of 
comparing performance year-on-year and are key measures used within the business for assessing performance. 

The Group makes adjustments to results reported under IFRS to exclude specific items and the pension charge to cash difference adjustment 
(see definitions below). Management believes this is a more meaningful basis upon which to analyse the business performance (in particular 
given the volatile nature of the IAS 19 charge) and is consistent with the way financial performance is reported to the Board. 

IFRS can have the impact of causing high levels of volatility in reported earnings which do not relate to changes in the operations of the Company. 
Management has reviewed the long term differences between reported and adjusted profit after tax. Cumulative reported profit after taxation 
for the five years ended March 2017 was £2,632 million. Cumulative adjusted profit after tax was £1,820 million. Annual reported profit after tax 
showed a range of £222 million to £1,280 million. The principal cause of the difference and volatility is due to pension-related accounting. 

APMs should not be considered in isolation from, or as a substitute to, financial information presented in compliance with GAAP. Where appropriate, 
reconciliations to the nearest GAAP measure have been provided. The APMs used may not be directly comparable with similarly titled APMs used by 
other companies. 

Presentation of results 
Re-presentation of 2015-16 results 
As a result of the acquisition of the minority shareholding in Romec Limited ('Romec') on 31 March 2016, the external revenues, costs and profits of 
Romec, previously reported in the Other segment, have been incorporated into UKPIL for 2016-17. As a result, £5 million of Romec revenue in 2015-16 
is now reported within letters and other revenue. The £141 million facilities management charge previously included within infrastructure costs has been 
reallocated between people and non-people costs. UKPIL operating profit in 2015-16 increased by £17 million as a result. There is no impact on Group 
operating profit. Both the Group and UKPIL operating costs for 2015-16 have been re-presented to reflect these changes as shown below: 

Adjusted 52 weeks ended 
27 March 2016 
£m 

Romec adjustment 
£m 

Re-presented 52 weeks 
ended 27 March 2016 
£m 

Group 
Revenue

Operating costs

People

Non-people

Distribution and conveyance costs

Infrastructure costs

Other operating costs

Operating profit before transformation costs

UKPIL 

Revenue

Operating cost

People

Non-people

Distribution and conveyance costs

Infrastructure costs

Other operating costs

Operating profit before transformation costs

Other 

Revenue

Operating cost

People

Non-people

Distribution and conveyance costs

Infrastructure costs

Other operating costs

Operating profit before transformation costs

9,251

(8,509)

(5,199)

(3,310)

(1,736)

(995)

(579)

742

7,666

(7,058)

(4,764)

(2,294)

(776)

(890)

(628)

608

5

12

(77)

89

–

–

89

17

–

–

–

–

–

141

(141)

– 

5

12

(77)

89

–

141

(52)

17

(5)

(12)

77

(89)

–

–

(89)

(17)

9,251 

(8,509) 

(5,199) 

(3,310) 

(1,736) 

(854) 

(720) 

742 

7,671 

(7,046) 

(4,841) 

(2,205) 

(776) 

(749) 

(680) 

625 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  33

Royal Mail plc 

|  Presentation of results and Alternative Performance Measures (APMs)

Adjusted results 
The following table reconciles the reported results, prepared in accordance with IFRS, to the adjusted results. 

(£m) 

Revenue

Operating costs
People costs1
Non-people costs

Distribution and conveyance costs
Infrastructure costs1
Other operating costs1

Operating profit before transformation costs
Transformation costs

Operating profit after transformation costs
Operating specific items: 

Employee Free Shares charge

Legacy/other (costs)/credit

Amortisation of intangible assets in acquisitions

Operating profit
Non-operating specific items: 

Profit on disposal of property, plant and 
equipment

Loss on disposal of business

Earnings before interest and tax
Finance costs

Finance income

Net pension interest (non-operating 
specific item)

Profit before tax
Tax charge

Profit for the period from continuing 
operations

Discontinued operations 
Profit from disposal of discontinued operations 
(non-operating specific item)

Tax on profit from disposal of discontinued 
operations

Profit for the period

Profit for the period attributable to: 
Equity holders of the parent Company

Non-controlling interests

Earnings per share 
Basic – continuing operations

Diluted – continuing operations

Basic – total Group

Diluted – total Group

52 weeks ended  
26 March 2017 

Specific items 
and pension 
adjustment

Reported 

52 weeks ended  
27 March 2016 

Specific items 
and pension 
adjustment

Adjusted

Reported1 

9,776

(9,286)

(5,576)

(3,710)

(2,106)

(868)

(736)

490

(137)

353

(105)

(18)

(11)

219

14

(2)

231

(18)

2

120

335

(62)

273

–

–

273

272

1

27.5p

27.3p

27.5p

27.3p

–

(222)

(222)

–

–

–

–

(222)

–

(222)

(105)

(18)

(11)

(356)

14

(2)

(344)

–

–

120

(224)

(59)

(165)

–

–

(165)

(165)

–

9,776

(9,064)

(5,354)

(3,710)

(2,106)

(868)

(736)

712

(137)

575

–

–

–

575

–

–

575

(18)

2

–

559

(121)

438

–

–

438

437

1

(16.6p)

(16.5p)

(16.6p)

(16.5p)

44.1p

43.8p

44.1p

43.8p

9,251

(8,766)

(5,456)

(3,310)

(1,736)

(854)

(720)

485

(191)

294

(158)

2

–

138

29

–

167

(16)

3

113

267

(45)

222

31

(5)

248

241

7

21.5p

21.4p

24.1p

24.0p

–

(257)

(257)

–

–

–

–

(257)

–

(257)

(158)

2

–

(413)

29

–

(384)

–

–

113

(271)

73

(198)

31

(5)

(172)

(172)

–

(19.8p)

(19.7p)

(17.2p)

(17.1p)

Adjusted1 

9,251 

(8,509) 

(5,199) 

(3,310) 

(1,736) 

(854) 

(720) 

742 

(191) 

551 

– 

– 

– 

551 

– 

– 

551 

(16) 

3 

– 

538 

(118) 

420 

– 

– 

420 

413 

7 

41.3p 

41.1p 

41.3p 

41.1p 

Alternative performance measures 
Non-IFRS measures 
Adjusted operating profit before transformation costs, adjusted operating profit after transformation costs and adjusted operating profit margin 
after transformation costs reflect reported operating profit excluding the ‘pension charge to cash difference’ adjustment. 

Adjusted earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation (EBITDA) before transformation costs 
Adjusted EBITDA before transformation costs is reported EBITDA before transformation costs with the pension charge to cash difference 
added back. 

EBITDA is considered to be a useful measure of operating performance because it approximates the underlying operating cash flow by 
eliminating depreciation, amortisation and the performance of associate companies.

1  Re-presented to reflect the Group’s acquisition of the remaining 49 per cent shareholding in Romec at the beginning of 2016-17, and to consolidate the results of Romec into 
the UKPIL segment (previously the Group’s 51 per cent shareholding was reported within the ‘Other’ segment). The 2015-16 UKPIL results have been re-presented to reflect 
this change.

34 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
 
The following table reconciles adjusted EBITDA before transformation costs to reported operating profit before transformation costs. 

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

(£m) 

Reported operating profit before transformation costs

Depreciation and amortisation

Share of post-tax (loss)/profit from associates

Reported EBITDA before transformation costs
Pension charge to cash difference adjustment

Adjusted EBITDA before transformation costs

52 weeks ended  
26 March 2017 

52 weeks ended  
27 March 2016 

490

301

2

793

222

1,015

485 

272 

(1) 

756 

257 

1,013 

Adjusted earnings per share 
Adjusted earnings per share is reported basic earnings per share, excluding operating and non-operating specific items and the pension charge to 
cash difference adjustment. A reconciliation of this number to reported basic earnings per share is included in the adjusted results table on page 34. 

Operating specific items 
These are recurring or non-recurring items of income or expense of a particular size and/or nature relating to the operations of the business that 
in Management’s opinion require separate identification. 

These include items that have resulted from events that are non-recurring in nature, even though related income/expense can be recognised in 
subsequent periods. 

Non-operating specific items 
These are recurring or non-recurring items of income or expense of a particular size and/or nature which do not form part of the Group’s trading 
activity and in Management’s opinion require separate identification. 

Further details of specific items can be found on page 27. 

Pension charge to cash difference adjustment 
This adjustment represents the difference between the IFRS income statement pension charge rate of 28.8 per cent and the actual cash payments 
into the RMPP at 17.1 per cent. This adjustment is made to eliminate the volatility of the IAS 19 accounting charge and to include only the true 
cash cost of the pension plans in the adjusted operating profit of the Group. 

In-year trading cash flow 
In-year trading cash flow reflects the cash generated from the trading activities of the Group. It is based on reported net cash inflow from 
operating activities, adjusted to exclude other working capital movements and the cash cost of operating specific items and to include the cash 
cost of property, plant and equipment and intangible asset acquisitions and net finance payments. Other working capital movements include 
movements in GLS client cash held and in deferred revenue from stamps purchased in prior periods. In-year trading cash flow is used primarily 
by Management as a measure of liquidity, showing cash being generated by operations less cash investment. 

The following table reconciles in-year trading cash flow to the nearest IFRS measure ‘net cash inflow from operating activities’. 

(£m) 
Net cash inflow from operating activities

Adjustment for: 

Other working capital movements

Cash cost of operating specific items

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Purchase of intangible assets (software)

Dividend received from associate company

Net finance costs paid

In-year trading cash inflow

Reported 
52 weeks ended  
26 March 2017 
754

Reported 
52 weeks ended  
27 March 2016 
727 

6

61

(230)

(157)

–

(14)

420

(6) 

6 

(270) 

(191) 

1 

(13) 

254 

Net debt 
Net debt is calculated by netting the value of financial liabilities (excluding derivatives) against cash and other liquid assets. 

Net debt is a measure of the Group’s net indebtedness that provides an indicator of the overall balance sheet strength. It is also a single measure 
that can be used to assess the combined impact of the Group’s indebtedness and its cash position. The use of the term net debt does not 
necessarily mean that the cash included in the net debt calculation is available to settle the liabilities included in this measure. 

A reconciliation of net debt to reported balance sheet line items is shown below. 

(£m) 
Loans/bonds

Finance leases

Cash and cash equivalents

Pension escrow (RMSEPP)

Net debt

At 26 March 
2017 
463

At 27 March 
2016 
392 

194

(299)

(20)

338

220 

(368) 

(20) 

224

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  35

Royal Mail plc 

|  Presentation of results and Alternative Performance Measures (APMs)

Underlying change 
Movements in revenue, costs, profits and margins are shown on an underlying basis. Underlying movements take into account differences in working 
days in UKPIL (2016-17: 305.6; 2015-16: 303.0) and movements in foreign exchange (2016-17: £1/€ 1.19; 2015-16: £1/€ 1.37) by re-presenting 
the 2015-16 results at 2016-17 working days/rates. In addition, adjustments are made for non-recurring or distorting items, which by their nature 
may be unpredictable, such as acquisitions and changes in wage legislation such as National Insurance. For volumes, underlying movements are 
adjusted for working days in UKPIL, the results of acquisitions and exclude political parties’ election mailings in letters volumes. For 2017-18, the 
estimated revenue and profit impact of working days in UKPIL is a redcution of around £15 million (2017-18: 305 days).

 (£m) 

Revenue 

UKPIL

GLS

Group

Group costs 

People

Distribution and conveyance costs

Infrastructure costs

Other operating costs

Non-people costs

Operating costs before 
transformation costs

UKPIL 

People

Distribution and conveyance costs

Infrastructure costs

Other operating costs

Non-people costs

Operating costs before 
transformation costs

GLS 

Operating costs

Profit, margins and EPS 

Group 

Operating profit before 
transformation costs

Transformation costs

Operating profit after 
transformation costs

Margin

Profit before tax

Tax

Profit for the period

Profit attributable to equity holders 
of the parent Company

Earnings per share (pence)

UKPIL 

Operating profit before 
transformation costs

Transformation costs

Operating profit after 
transformation costs

Margin

GLS 

Operating profit before 
transformation costs

Margin

Adjusted 
52 weeks  
ended 
26 March 17 

Re-presented 
52 weeks  
ended 

27 March 16  Working days 

Wage 
legislation 

Foreign 
exchange 

Acquisitions 

Underlying  
52 weeks 
ended  
27 March 16 

Underlying 
change 

7,658

2,118

9,776

(5,354)

(2,106)

(868)

(736)

(3,710)

(9,064)

7,671

1,580

9,251

(5,199)

(1,736)

(854)

(720)

(3,310)

(8,509)

(4,865)

(4,841)

(828)

(740)

(677)

(2,245)

(7,110)

(776)

(749)

(680)

(2,205)

(7,046)

(1,954)

(1,463)

712

(137)

575

5.9%

559

(121)

438

437

44.1

548

(137)

411

5.4%

164

7.7%

742

(191)

551

6.0%

538

(118)

420

413

41.3

625

(191)

434

5.7%

117

7.4%

66

–

66

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

66

–

66

–

66

–

66

–

66

–

–

–

–

–

–

(65)

–

–

–

–

(65)

(65)

–

–

–

–

(65)

28

233

261

(53)

(179)

(15)

(5)

(199)

(252)

–

(37)

–

–

(37)

(37)

13

124

137

(45)

(68)

(9)

(8)

(85)

(130)

(3)

(8)

(1)

–

(9)

(12)

7,778

1,937

9,715

(5,362)

(1,983)

(878)

(733)

(3,594)

(8,956)

(4,909)

(821)

(750)

(680)

(2,251)

(7,160)

(2%) 

9% 

1% 

Flat 

6% 

(1%) 

Flat 

3% 

1% 

(1%) 

1% 

(1%) 

Flat 

Flat 

(1%) 

–

(215)

(118)

(1,796)

9% 

(65)

–

(65)

–

(65)

–

(65)

–

(65)

–

–

–

9

–

9

–

9

–

(9)

–

(9)

–

18

–

7

–

7

–

7

–

1

–

1

–

6

–

759

(191)

568

5.8%

555

(118)

420

413

41.3

618

(191)

427

(6%) 

(28%) 

2% 

10bps 

1% 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(11%) 

(28%) 

(4%) 

5.5%

(10bps) 

141

7.3%

16% 

40bps

36 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Principal risks 

The Governance section describes in detail how the Group manages its risk from the Group Board 
level, its respective sub-committees and throughout the organisation. Further details can be found 
on pages 48 – 87. 

The table below details each principal business risk, those aspects that would be impacted were the risk to 

materialise, our assessment of the current status of the risk, and how the Group mitigates it. 

Key 
Link to strategy

Winning in parcels 

Defending letters 

Growing in new areas 

Relative severity

Change during the year

Speed at which the risk could impact 

High 

Medium 

Low 

Increasing risk 

Decreasing risk 

Stable

 Fast: 6 months

 Medium: 6-12 months

 Slow: >12 months 

Principal risk

Status

How we are mitigating the risk 

New arrangements and the risk of industrial action 
There is extensive trade union recognition in respect of our workforce in the UK with a strong and active trade union. As Royal Mail Group continues to pursue the 
necessary efficiency programmes in order to remain competitive in the letters and parcels markets and implements the new pension arrangements, there is an 
even greater risk of industrial action. 

Industrial action 

There is a risk that one or more material disagreements 
or disputes between the Group and its trade unions 
could result in widespread localised or national 
industrial action. 

Widespread localised or national industrial action 
would cause material disruption to our business in the 
UK and would be likely to result in an immediate and 
potentially ongoing significant loss of revenue for the 
Group. It may also cause Royal Mail to fail to meet the 
Quality of Service targets prescribed by Ofcom, leading 
to enforcement action and fines. 

The Agenda for Growth agreement developed jointly 
with the Communications Workers Union (CWU) 
represented a fundamental change in our relationship 
with the CWU, and continues to promote stability in 
industrial relations. 

•  Our Agenda for Growth agreement with the 

CWU provides a joint commitment to improved 
industrial relations, and to resolving disputes 
at pace and in a way that is beneficial to both 
employees and Royal Mail. 

Industrial relations is an inherent risk within our 
business. We are negotiating a new pay deal for 
2017-18 onwards and have completed a consultation 
of the future of the Royal Mail Pension Plan (RMPP). 
This, in combination with the continued pressure on 
costs and efficiencies in an increasingly competitive 
market, may put additional strain on the stability of 
our industrial relations. 

•  A resolution process for local disputes uses 

trained mediators nominated by and representing 
both the CWU and the business. 

•  The Agenda for Growth agreement has legally 

binding protections for the workforce in respect 
of future job security and our employment model, 
but which can be rescinded in the event of national 
industrial action. 

Pension arrangements 

We recognise that pension benefits are important to 
our people. 

There is a risk that we are unable to continue 
to provide sustainable and affordable pension 
arrangements which are acceptable to our people 
and unions, leading to industrial action. 

The Group is exposed to financial market conditions, 
changes in life expectancy and regulatory changes 
for defined benefits already accrued. Benefits 
accrued in the Royal Mail Pension Plan before April 
2012 have been transferred to Government. 

•  We are exploring a range of options with 

our people, unions and advisers regarding 
future pension benefits. We have a clear set of 
affordability and capital allocation criteria for 
assessing any future pension arrangements. 

•  The March 2015 Royal Mail Pension Plan valuation 
was agreed on 8 May 2017 with the RMPP Trustee. 
This is based on a prudent set of assumptions, 
appropriate to the Company’s circumstances. 

•  After the RMPP closes to accrual, we will continue 
to work closely with the Trustee to limit the risk 
of any deficit recovery payments being required 
from the Company in future.

In 2013, we committed to keeping the RMPP 
open until at least March 2018, subject to certain 
conditions. The RMPP Trustee put in place a hedging 
strategy for that period of accrual which means 
we will be able to meet this commitment despite 
significant reductions in real interest rates. 

While the RMPP is currently in surplus, we expect this 
surplus will run out in 2018. On 8 May 2017, the Company 
and the Trustee agreed the March 2015 actuarial valuation 
and revised Schedule of Contributions following the 
decision to close the RMPP to future accrual from 
31 March 2018. Closing the RMPP now avoids an 
unaffordable increase in pension costs for the Group. 

As noted, the RMPP is hedged against future 
interest rate and inflation rate exposures, arising 
on commitments made until March 2018, so we 
are confident that this will enable us to meet our 
commitment to keep the RMPP open to accrual up to 
31 March 2018. 

We remain in discussions with our unions regarding the 
provision of future pension benefits from April 2018. 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  37

Royal Mail plc 

|  Principal risks

Principal risk

Efficiency 

Status

How we are mitigating the risk

Royal Mail must continuously become more efficient 
and flexible in order to compete effectively in the 
letter and parcel markets. 

The success of our strategy relies on the effective 
control of costs across all areas and the delivery of 
efficiency benefits. 

In the current industrial relations environment, 
there is a risk we cannot make the required short 
term business as usual and/or programme level cost 
reductions in a timely way; nor can we trial, with a 
view to broader roll out, more fundamental changes 
in methods required to meet customer requirements 
and to underpin future cost reductions. 

We are continuing to see the positive impact of our 
cost reduction activities across the UK business. 
This has involved continuous focus on our efficiency 
performance in all areas, while providing a high 
quality service to our customers through our 
engaged workforce. 

Our productivity improvement is towards the upper 
range of our 2-3 per cent target, and we are confident 
that we will deliver the £600 million cumulative 
annualised cost avoided target, previously 
announced. 

As we negotiate fundamental changes to our pension 
and other terms and conditions, there is a risk that 
our workforce will delay the change we need. 

•  We have ongoing collaborative meetings with 
our unions to involve them in the efficiency 
improvements and growth opportunities. 

•  We are delivering efficiencies both in and outside 
of the core operations and have over 200 projects 
and initiatives which underpin the £600 million 
cumulative annualised cost avoided target. 

•  We continue to scope additional cost saving 
opportunities beyond 2017-18. However, the 
present trend of cost savings may not be 
sustainable and the need to deliver operational 
efficiencies will become greater. 

Changes in market conditions and customer behaviour 
The industry sectors in which we operate remain highly competitive, with customers demanding more and our competitors responding quickly to these 
changing demands. 

Customer expectations and Royal Mail’s 
responsiveness to market changes 

Changes in customer expectations, and changes 
in the markets in which the Group operates, could 
impact the demand for our products and services. 

We expect the letters sector to remain in structural 
decline, in the medium term, driven by e-substitution 
and further economic uncertainty. 

There is a risk that our product offerings and 
customer experience may not adequately meet 
evolving customer expectations, or that we are 
unable to innovate or adapt our commercial and 
operational activities fast enough to respond to 
changes in the market. 

The parcels sector is undergoing rapid change. 
Competition in the UK domestic and international 
markets continues to intensify, with competitors 
offering innovative solutions that include convenient, 
reliable delivery and return options, and improved 
tracking facilities. 

The UK has one of the most developed e-commerce 
markets in the world. Growth available in the 
addressable UK parcels market continues to be 
impacted by Amazon's activities. Capacity expansion 
in the sector continues to exert downward pressure 
on prices. 

In the parcels business, disintermediation in online 
marketplaces may divert traffic to other carriers. 

There is a continuing requirement to invest in 
targeted growth and innovation to meet these 
challenges in the marketplace as well as reducing 
cost to ensure better price competitiveness. 

There are also potential behavioural changes by 
customers relating to the upcoming regulatory 
developments at the European level around data, 
including marketing mail. 

•  We use continuous in depth market monitoring 
and research to track how well we match our 
customers’ expectations, including relative to our 
competitors, and to predict volume trends. 

•  We continue to invest and introduce, at pace, new 

and improved products and services that: enhance 
customers’ online and delivery experience; 
expand our core offering to small and medium 
sized businesses and marketplace sellers; 
and extend our product coverage. We target 
investments that will extend our value chain offer 
and increase our presence in faster growing areas 
of the parcels sector. 

•  We continue to work with Amazon to provide 

enhanced propositions and high quality of service. 

•  We promote the value of letters to customers 

through targeting advertisers and ad agencies, 
using our Mailmen campaign. We are also giving 
customers incentives to test new ways of using 
mail at a discounted rate. 

•  We are investing in our Mail Centre equipment 
to ensure we get the best out of our machinery. 
To help add value to the mail and keep customers 
using it, we invested in Mailmark® last year. 
It gives customers visibility of their items in our 
pipeline and data on the effectiveness of their 
mailings. Around 80 per cent of suitable letters are 
sent using Mailmark®. Further, we are planning 
investment to rollout barcodes to unsorted letters 
next year. 

•  We continue to monitor developments and actively 

promote the value of marketing mail.

38 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Principal risk

Economic environment 

Status

How we are mitigating the risk

Historically, there has been a correlation between 
economic conditions and the level of letter and 
parcel volumes. Flat or adverse economic conditions 
could impact our ability to maintain and grow 
revenue, either by reducing volumes or encouraging 
customers to adopt cheaper service options for 
sending letters and parcels. 

While economic conditions in the UK have proved 
resilient, business uncertainty before and after 
the EU referendum has resulted in a slowdown 
in marketing activity. We continue to monitor the 
broader long term economic impact on the UK 
economy. 

Economic growth in the Eurozone remains fragile. 
Low growth or recession in Europe could impact 
our international parcel volumes, including those 
handled by GLS. 

•  We have a challenging cost avoidance programme 

in place to respond to revenue headwinds. 

•  Net cash investment is expected to be around 

£450 million in 2017-18 and less than £500 million 
per annum going forward. 

• 

In the event of an economic shock, we are able to 
reduce investment over the short term to protect 
the cash and indebtedness position of the business. 

Growing in new areas 

Our success in growing in new areas of business is 
dependent on such factors as our continued ability 
to identify new profitable and sustainable areas of 
business, implementing appropriate investments, 
and having in place suitable structures to support 
continued transformation of the business. 

Royal Mail Group is well positioned to grow in 
new markets through its subsidiary, GLS. It has a 
replicable and scalable business model founded on 
the development of strong regional businesses. 

Through increasing its footprint and focusing on 
growth opportunities in the deferred parcels space, 
with selective growth in the B2C parcels market, 
GLS is well positioned to support Royal Mail Group’s 
overall strategy. 

•  Our acquisitions are primarily delivered 

through a targeted and focused expansion of 
GLS’ geographic footprint, investing behind a 
proven operating model with a track record of 
identification, integration and optimisation of 
acquisitions over many years. 

•  We are also developing partnerships with 

retailers and network partners to stimulate 
cross-border volumes between the UK and Asia, 
as well as working with China Post to provide 
Chinese and UK customers with faster delivery 
and tracking services. 

•  We also have a number of small scale initiatives 

to seek new revenues which leverage our 
existing assets. 

Regulatory and legislative environment 
The business operates in a regulated environment. Changes in legal and regulatory requirements could impact our ability to meet our targets and goals. 

Absence of a sustainability framework to 
sustain the USO 

USO finances are fragile. The regulatory system 
applies constraints to Royal Mail’s ability to 
compete for traffic to support the costs of the 
Universal Service network. It imposes operational 
requirements not applied generally to the industry. 
These may impact our revenues and our ability 
to compete in the highly competitive sectors in 
which we operate. This could ultimately impact 
our ability to deliver the Universal Service on a 
sustainable basis. 

Ofcom concluded its Fundamental Review of the 
Regulation of Royal Mail (FRR) in March 2017. It did 
not re-introduce price controls or add binding 
efficiency targets. However, it has not taken 
forward our proposal for a proactive sustainability 
framework. It has also not taken forward the 
opportunity to raise consumer protection standards 
across the industry. 

In terms of follow-up consultations, Ofcom is 
consulting on a new regulatory reporting framework 
to reflect the outcome of its FRR. It is also planning 
on conducting a cost allocation review. This will 
review the allocation of Royal Mail’s delivery costs 
between parcels and letters. 

We are continuing to lobby BEIS and Ofcom to tackle 
emerging issues of USO sustainability. We are 
arguing for fundamental changes in the regulatory 
environment including: 

•  greater focus on sustainability, rather than 
on competition issues, including through 
the prompt introduction of a proactive 
sustainability framework; 

•  procedural fairness issues and enforcement; 

•  a material decrease in the significant regulatory 

burden; and 

•  a level playing field across the whole industry, 

including higher consumer protection standards 
in parcels. 

We will engage fully with Ofcom’s regulatory 
reporting review, to ensure a more targeted regime 
that reduces the regulatory burden.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  39

Royal Mail plc 

|  Principal risks

Principal risk

Status

How we are mitigating the risk

Competition Act investigation 

In January 2014, Royal Mail issued Contract Change 
Notices (CCNs) under the terms of the access 
contract regime. 

In February 2014, Ofcom announced that they would 
investigate some of these CCNs. The opening of the 
investigation automatically suspended the CCNs that 
were the subject of the investigation. These CCNs 
were therefore never implemented. 

Ofcom issued a statement of objections in July 
2015. This statement sets out Ofcom’s provisional 
view that Royal Mail breached competition law by 
engaging in conduct that amounted to unlawful 
discrimination against postal operators competing 
with Royal Mail in delivery. 

Depending on the outcome of the Ofcom 
investigation and any appeal, Royal Mail may 
be fined. 

Employment legislation and regulation 

Changes to laws and regulations relating to 
employment (including the interpretation and 
enforcement of those laws and regulations) could, 
directly or indirectly, increase the Group’s labour 
costs. Given the size of the Group’s workforce, this 
could have an adverse effect on the Group. 

Other 

Cyber security 

We are subject to a range of regulations, contractual 
compliance obligations, and customer expectations 
around the governance and protection of various 
classes of data. In common with all major 
organisations, we are the potential target of cyber 
attacks that could threaten the confidentiality, 
integrity and availability of data in our systems. 

A cyber security incident could also trigger material 
service interruption. 

Either of these outcomes could result in financial 
and reputation damage, including loss of 
customer confidence. 

Royal Mail is refuting all of the allegations. 

Ofcom has stated that their final decision is likely to 
be made in 2017-18. 

•  We have robustly defended our conduct in both 
written and oral representations to Ofcom. 

•  This reflects our belief that the 2014 CCNs under 

investigation, which were never implemented and 
have now been withdrawn, were fully compliant 
with competition law. Please refer to our 
contingent liabilities disclosure on page 130. 

•  We will continue to defend our case. 

•  We continue to monitor developments in case law 
relating to the application of the Working Time 
Directive in respect of holiday pay calculations. 
Based on our estimates of the potential financial 
impact, we believe that we have made sufficient 
provision for any historic liabilities that may arise. 

•  We liaise with the CBI, HMRC and HM Treasury 
to influence employment tax developments 
and minimise the impacts for Royal Mail as far 
as possible. 

Recent case law has suggested that, in some 
circumstances, regular overtime and commission 
payments should form part of holiday pay 
calculations. The legal position remains unclear 
as case law is still evolving in this area. We have 
commenced discussions with the trade union 
about the application of holiday pay for part timers 
but anticipate that this still will take some time 
to implement. 

Other risks to our cost base associated with 
employment legislation have emerged and were 
disclosed in our financial results for the half year 
ended 27 September 2016. These are: 

•  The Apprenticeship Levy came into effect in 

April 2017, with an estimated cost to Royal Mail of 
around £20 million. 

•  Proposed changes to National Insurance (NI) on 

termination of employment have been announced, 
which will increase employers’ NI costs from 
April 2018. 

•  Changes to tax/NI on salary sacrifice benefits 
came into effect from 1 April 2017, although 
pensions have specifically been excluded from 
these regulations. 

While no material losses related to cyber security 
breaches have been suffered, given the increasing 
sophistication and evolving nature of this threat, and 
our reliance on technology and data for operational 
and strategic purposes, we consider cyber security a 
principal risk. 

•  As external threats become more sophisticated, 
and the potential impact of service disruption 
increases, we continue to invest in cyber security. 
Recognising that this risk cannot be eliminated, 
we have implemented significant protective 
measures which will need to be continuously 
enhanced in light of the changes and threats 
we face. 

40 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Principal risk

Status

How we are mitigating the risk

Attracting and retaining senior 
management and key personnel 

Our performance, operating results and future 
growth depend on our ability to attract and retain 
talent with the appropriate level of expertise. 

Turnover in senior and key personnel has been at 
normal levels for the business during the year, but 
this remains an inherent business risk. 

•  The Group’s remuneration policy sets out that 
the overall remuneration package should be 
sufficiently competitive to attract, retain and 
motivate executives with the commercial 
experience to run a large, complex business in a 
highly challenging context. 

•  We operate a succession planning process 
and have in place talent identification and 
development programmes. 

Viability Statement 
The Directors have assessed the viability of the 
Group as part of their ongoing risk management 
and monitoring processes. 

While the Directors have no reason to believe 
that the Group will not be viable over the longer 
term, they consider the three financial years 
to March 2020 to be an appropriate planning 
time horizon to assess Royal Mail’s viability 
and to determine the probability and impact of 
our principal risks. This is the same time frame 
of our existing medium term planning cycle 
and therefore a period over which planning 
assumptions and the impact of strategic 
initiatives are scrutinised. This period also aligns 
with the performance criteria in our long-term 
incentive plans (LTIP). 

Business divisions prepare detailed annual 
forecasts for a 12 month period and project 
performance over three years with reference to 
economic assumptions and strategic initiatives. 

The key assumptions within the projections were 
stress-tested with reference to risks set out in 
the Principal Risks section on pages 37-41 but 
focused on those that could have a plausible and 
severe financial impact over the plan horizon. 

This year, the Directors considered (i) the potential 
impact of industrial action; (ii) deteriorating 
economic and market conditions which could 
result in letters volume decline greater than 
our projected four to six per cent range and (iii) 
increased competition in the UK parcels sector. 
In addition we have not assumed any material 
impact from our initiatives to grow in new areas. 

These risks were quantified to create a 
downside scenario that took into account the 
levels of committed capital and expenditure, 
as well as other short term cost and cash 
actions which could mitigate the impact of 
the risks. Consideration was also given to the 
large fixed cost base required to deliver the 

Universal Service Obligation in its current form. 
The downside scenario was tested to determine 
whether the Group would remain solvent. 

The Company has decided that the Royal Mail 
Pension Plan will close to future accrual on 
31 March 2018. On 8 May 2017, the Company 
and the RMPP Trustee agreed the March 
2015 actuarial valuation and revised Schedule 
of Contributions following this decision. 
We continue to work closely with our unions 
on a sustainable and affordable solution for the 
provision of future pension benefits. In making 
their assessment of viability, the Directors have 
assumed that future cash pension contributions 
are consistent with those made in 2016-17. 

Based on the results of their analysis, the 
Directors have a reasonable expectation that the 
Group will be able to continue in operation and 
meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period 
to March 2020.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  41

Royal Mail plc 

|  Corporate responsibility

Responsibility 
leader 

Our 
performance 

FTSE4Good 

Ranked second globally 
in the Transportation and 
Transportation Infrastructure  
industry in the Dow Jones 
Sustainability Indices 

Royal Mail is a constituent 
of the FTSE4Good Index, 
ranking in the top 15 per cent 
of companies 

12.3% 

12.3 per cent reduction in 
road traffic collisions 

Times Top 50 
Employer for 
Women, for 
the fourth 
consecutive 
year2 

85 per cent of people in 
the UK think Royal Mail is 
an important part of local 
communities1 

Winner

Two awards won for our 
partnership with the charity 
Missing People 

1  Ipsos MORI Corporate Image Survey Winter 2016. 
2  During the year, we were listed as a Times Top 50 Employer for Women for the third time. Shortly after the financial 

year end, we were included in the list for the fourth time.

42 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Corporate responsibility 

experience. This year we achieved a customer 
focus score of 692, an increase of two points 
compared to the previous year. 

Our corporate responsibility (CR) strategy is an integral part 
of realising our core strategic priorities. The objectives at the 
heart of our business and corporate responsibility strategies 
are the same – to generate sustainable shareholder value. 

Our CR strategy comprises six key objectives: 

•  Deliver economic and social benefit to the 

communities we serve 

•  Drive colleague advocacy for the Group 

and its community role 

•  Manage the environmental impacts of our 

business and operations 

•  Deliver our transformation responsibly 

•  Operate with integrity 

•  Communicate our management of 
corporate responsibilities openly 
and transparently 

Our CR objectives support the delivery of 
our business strategy. We report progress 
against them under the areas of Customer, 
People, Community, Environment and 
Suppliers. Further information will 
be available in the 2016-17 Corporate 
Responsibility Report. 

Measuring our progress 
We are independently rated as a leading 
responsible business. We have been named a 
global leader in the Dow Jones Sustainability 
Indices for a third year. We were ranked 
second among around 100 companies in 
the Transportation and Transportation 
Infrastructure Industry. We were previously 
ranked number one globally, two years in 
a row. Royal Mail is included in both the 
Dow Jones Sustainability World Index and 
the Dow Jones Sustainability Europe Index. 
We have been included every year we have 
been eligible, since our flotation. 

We were again included in the FTSE4Good 
Global Index in 2016. We were ranked in the 
top 15 per cent of companies included, on 
account of our environmental, social and 
governance performance. 

Our customers 
Royal Mail is the UK’s most trusted delivery 
company1. We are proud of the role we 
play in connecting customers, businesses, 
organisations and communities, including 
those in remote and rural areas. 

We are continuously adapting our business to 
respond to customers’ changing expectations. 
This includes improving customer convenience 
and flexibility to support consumers, small 
and medium enterprises and marketplace 
sellers. We are building our capability to 
handle increased numbers of larger parcels, 
where appropriate, and investing in tracking 
and automation. 

We have three customer service indicators 
on our Corporate Balanced Scorecard. 
All of them are equally weighted. They 
are: Retail First Class Quality of Service; 
business customer satisfaction; and 
customer complaints. (See page 18 for more 
information). We exceeded our First Class 
target. Our mean business satisfaction score 
improved by two points to 78. The consumer 
satisfaction score remained stable at 72. 
There was, however, an overall increase in 
complaints in 2016-17, driven principally by 
the growth in tracked parcels. As a result 
of a range of initiatives, we reduced the 
number of complaints in key categories like 
misdeliveries and redirections. On the other 
hand, Denial of Receipt complaints – these 
relate to parcels – increased. This is an area 
of real focus for us. We are concentrating on 
improving the scanning of items and ensuring 
that if an item is left with a neighbour, 
the appropriate details are written on the 
‘Something for You’ card. 

After our customers, our employees are best 
placed to evaluate how customer-focused 
our products and services really are. We use 
our annual Employee Survey to gauge what 
they think about key aspects of the customer 

1  Research by the Business Brand Tracker 2016–17 

Tackling the scourge of scam mail 
Royal Mail never knowingly delivers scam 
mail – it is a scourge. We understand the 
upset and distress that it can cause. This 
year, we worked with our employees, 
industry partners and law enforcement 
agencies to tackle this issue even more 
vigorously. A range of new measures were 
implemented to strengthen our ability to 
stem the flow of scam mail in the postal 
system. We launched an industry-wide Code 
of Practice on scam mail, and have secured 
all major UK mail operators’ commitment 
to it. We also introduced anti-scam clauses 
into bulk mail contracts with our customers. 
We can now check items we suspect to be 
scam mail, refuse to process or deliver it, and 
terminate a customer’s contract in certain 
circumstances. Since launching this new 
scheme, we have stopped over 700,000 scam 
items from reaching customers. 

Following year end, we launched another 
major new initiative to protect consumers 
from scam mail. We are contacting 
households that we believe are receiving high 
volumes of scam mail. This latest anti-scam 
initiative will initially focus on the most 
impacted customers. It will be extended in 
due course. 

Our people 
Achievement of our strategic priorities 
depends on our people. They represent 
our Company among customers and 
communities. We rely on them to fulfil the 
Universal Service and deliver high-quality 
customer service. Engaging our people within 
a fair, rewarding and customer-focused 
culture is essential for our future success. 

Pay and terms & conditions 
We believe good employment conditions 
drive quality of service. All of our permanent 
employees earn above the Living Wage. They 
also receive the additional benefits associated 
with permanent employment, such as paid 
holiday and a good pension. We are committed 
to continuing to provide the best pay and 
terms and conditions in our industry. In return, 
however, we continually work with our unions 
to agree changes to our working practices and 
labour model. This process of change is about 
sustaining our business now and in the future, 
particularly given the decline in letter volumes. 

Our Agenda for Growth agreement with 
the Communications Workers Union, put in 
place in 2013, includes legally binding terms 
covering employee pay, protections and 
industrial stability as well as a programme 

Survey.

2  Out of 100.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  43

Royal Mail plc 

|  Corporate responsibility

of work to help deliver change. We are 
now working with our unions to agree and 
implement our vision for the future. We are 
seeking more change at pace and in a way 
that is fair to all of our people across the UK. 
We recognise that change is difficult. But, it 
is essential that we keep transforming the 
business given the challenges we face. 

Engagement and culture 
Employee engagement is one of the two 
people-related key performance indicators 
on our Corporate Balanced Scorecard (see 
page 18 for more information). Employee 
engagement is measured through our annual 
Employee Survey. In 2016-17, we maintained 
our employee engagement score of 57. 
Against a backdrop of significant change for 
our business, we have achieved an above 
average3 employee engagement score for the 
last two years. 

An extensive internal communications 
programme is in place across our business. 
We held 39 ‘town hall’ meetings in the UK 
this year, where senior managers addressed 
thousands of frontline colleagues and middle 
managers. Senior managers also held many 
on-site engagement sessions. 

Share ownership 
During 2016-17, the Royal Mail Share 
Incentive Plan Trust distributed the final one 
per cent of shares that had been gifted to it 
for eligible employees, following the disposal 
of HM Government’s holding in 2015-16. 
All of our eligible full-time employees have 
now received a maximum of 913 Free 
Shares, regardless of grade. This means that 
12 per cent of the Company has been awarded 
to colleagues. This is one of the largest free 
stakes made available to employees as part of 
any major UK privatisation. 

Health and safety 
The safety and wellbeing of our workforce 
is a key priority for us. There was a slight 
increase in sick absence this year, from 
4.51 per cent in 2015-16, to 4.63 per cent 
in 2016-17. We maintained our Lost Time 
Accident Frequency Rate at 0.49 in 2016-17. 
We use on-going communications to 
reinforce safety messages with the aim of 
making safe behaviours part of our business 
as usual activities. Road traffic collisions 
are one of the main causes of accidents. 
In 2016-17, the Road Traffic Collision 
Frequency Rate (RTCFR) was added to our 
Corporate Balanced Scorecard to increase 
focus on this area. This year, we reduced our 
RTCFR by 12.3 per cent. 

3  Our engagement score compares favourably with the 
Ipsos MORI norm for large organisations. Our score is 
one point higher than the norm, which is 56. Currently 
the trend is downwards for employee engagement in 
large organisations. 

Unfortunately, however, accidents still 
sometimes happen. It is with great regret 
that we report that one4 person lost their life 
in connection with our activities in the UK 
in the past year. We liaise closely with the 
relevant authorities and complete our own 
detailed investigations to determine the root 
cause of each accident and, where possible, 
to determine what lessons can be learned. 
Investigations are discussed at Board level and 
outcomes are communicated across the Group. 

Musculoskeletal issues are one of the leading 
causes of illness among our people. This 
year, we launched a new programme to 
investigate the causes of musculoskeletal 
problems and identify any job-specific trends. 
We held workshops at sites with higher than 
average rates of musculoskeletal issues and 
surveyed colleagues about their roles. We also 
established a working group to look specifically 
at health issues faced by older colleagues and 
created an action plan to improve job design 
and the support services available. 

Mental health is another leading form of 
ill health in the UK and our workforce. It is 
a focal point of our health and wellbeing 
strategy. This is about reaffirming our 
commitment to helping end the stigma 
of mental ill-health in the workplace. 
We created a dedicated ‘First Class Mental 
Health’ self-help toolkit for managers, and 
produced five short films on mental health, 
in partnership with the Mental Health 
Foundation, to support colleagues. We have 
begun delivering Mental Health First Aid 
training to managers. So far, 431 managers 
have been trained on the course, delivered 
by Mental Health First Aid England. There 
is much more, however, that we need to do 
as a major employer. In 2017-18, we will 
significantly expand our support for mental 
health by launching a major, strategic 
charity partnership with Action for Children 
focused on mental health. It will be an 
integrated programme covering training, 
awareness-raising, communications, 
pro-bono support, work placements and 
fundraising (see page 45). 

Promoting diversity 
Royal Mail employs a diverse mix of 
people who reflect the communities we 
serve. We are committed to being an equal 
opportunities employer and we proactively 

seek to recruit people from socially 
excluded groups. It is our policy to provide 
opportunities for our employees based on 
an individual’s performance and skills, with 
no discrimination. 

Gender diversity 
In 2016-17, Royal Mail was named as one of 
The Times Top 50 Employers for Women for 
the fourth consecutive year. We were also 
listed as a top 20 company for senior leader 
gender diversity in the Hampton-Alexander 
Review; an independent, Government 
supported review of diversity in FTSE 
100 companies. At Board level, 50 per cent 
of members are women, which compares 
well to the FTSE 100 average of 27 per cent. 
At senior management level, 30 per cent of 
our colleagues are women, compared with 
16 per cent in operational grades. 

We address the gender balance across 
our organisation through initiatives such 
as balanced shortlisting. This has helped 
to increase the number of women hired in 
frontline roles. During the year, we launched 
a new drive to increase the number of 
women appointed to Delivery Office Manager 
positions, offering candidates support 
through a 12-week development programme 
before being placed into a role. As a result, 
we have appointed 46 women in Delivery 
Office Manager roles in 2016-17, making up 
26 per cent of Delivery Office hires this year. 

Each year, we conduct a gender pay review 
across our UK business, comparing the 
salaries we pay men and women. We are 
currently carrying out the required analysis 
in accordance with the new gender pay 
gap reporting regulations. We will publish 
the outcomes in 2017-18, in line with the 
statutory timescales. 

Ethnic diversity 
Royal Mail’s ethnic profile is broadly 
representative of the UK population. Around 
11 per cent of our employees declare 
themselves to be from ethnic minority 
backgrounds. We work with Business in the 
Community’s (BITC) Opportunity Now and 
Race for Opportunity programmes, which 
promote best practice in equal opportunities. 

KPIs5

2016-17

2015-16

2014-15

2013-14 

Lost Time Accident Frequency Rate6

0.49

Sick absence (%)

4.63

0.49

4.51

0.70

4.74

0.81 

4.34

4  We disclose fatalities that have been confirmed during the reporting year. 
5  Data represents UKPIL safety performance. 
6  Lost Time Accident Frequency Rate is calculated by dividing the number of Lost Time Accidents for last 12 months 

by the number of hours worked for last 12 months, and multiplying this by 100,000.

44 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Gender distribution 
(number of people) 

Royal Mail plc Board

Senior Management1

Management

Administration

Operational

UKPIL

GLS 

Female

Male

Female

Male 

4

731

1,420

1,428

4

1,704

5,280 

980 

n/a

39

n/a 

246 

3,183

2,528 

20,011

107,131

1,993

9,147 

1  Includes direct reports of Chief Executive’s Committee members 

Supporting people with 
disabilities 
We are committed to employing people 
with disabilities and supporting disabled 
employees during employment. This year, 
we have achieved Employer Level 2 of the 
new Disability Confident programme, which 
replaces the Disability Two Ticks scheme. 
Approximately seven per cent of our 
employees identify themselves as having a 
disability. We make reasonable adjustments 
to the workplace to support employees who 
are disabled, or become disabled. We provide 
training as required, for example, in assistive 
technology and software. 

Since 2006, we have been a national partner 
of the disability charity Remploy, working 
together to provide jobs and placements 
for people with disabilities. In 2016-17, 
we offered 142 placements to disabled 
and disadvantaged candidates. To date, 
we have employed over 2,200 people 
through Remploy. 

Inclusive workplaces 
We are a member of Stonewall’s Diversity 
Champions programme, which campaigns 
for equality for lesbian, gay, bisexual and 
transgender (LGBT) people. We moved up 
25 places in the 2017 Workplace Equality 
Index by Stonewall. We are now ranked 
number 266 out of 439 organisations, 
up from 291 in 2016. In June 2016, more 
than 100 of our people took part in the 
Pride in London parade celebrating the 
LGBT community. 

Training and career development 
We are committed to investing in our people 
to equip them with the skills they need to 
deliver our business strategy. In 2016-17, we 
invested £13.8 million in training, delivering 
the equivalent of almost 25,000 training days 
for our UK colleagues. We also established 
a Continuous Improvement Leadership 
Academy to support the development of Mail 
Centre leaders. The eight-week programme 
aims to improve leaders’ ability to streamline 

processes and reduce waste. So far, 
44 colleagues have taken part. At senior 
levels, we enrol our people in leadership 
programmes at Oxford Said Business School. 
Since the programme began in 2014, 280 
colleagues attended, of which 35 per cent 
were women. 

In GLS, employees in Poland have access to 
books and audio-books covering professional 
and personal development. GLS Denmark 
has rolled out customer focus training, 
which involves colleagues learning from best 
practice across the organisation. So far, more 
than 110 colleagues have taken part. 

Our communities 
Royal Mail seeks to be an integral, valued 
and trusted part of every community 
that our service reaches. Our main 
contribution to communities is our social 
and economic impact. We make the fifth 
biggest contribution of any UK company to 
the UK economy7. The Universal Service is 
a key driver of UK economic growth and an 
integral part of the digital economy, which is 
strategically important to the UK’s economic 
future. One in every 185 jobs in the UK is 
provided by Royal Mail. Our employment is 
disproportionately weighted towards areas 
where there are fewer job opportunities 
available, enabling us to make a significant 
contribution to social inclusion. We seek 
to build on the core economic and social 
contribution of our business operations by 
making strategic community investments 

7  Cebr adapted the original gross valued added (GVA) 

scoreboard developed by the Department for 
Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy (BEIS, BIS at 
the time) to take account of companies’ UK operations 
only. The original GVA scoreboard included 
companies’ overseas impacts. In this adapted 
scoreboard, for 2016-17, UKPIL ranks in fifth place. 
Cebr inputted financial, supply chain and employee 
data for the financial year 2016-17 into the national 
accounting framework provided by the Office for 
National Statistics’ supply-use and input-output 
tables to establish UKPIL’s direct and indirect 
contribution to the UK and enable UKPIL to be ranked 
in this way. The full study methodology is published 
online at www.royalmailgroup.com/responsibility/ 
cr-reports.

and by using our business assets to 
benefit society. 

In 2016-17, Royal Mail contributed 
£7.9 million directly to good causes and 
schemes for disadvantaged groups. 
That includes £700,000 in matched giving 
and grant schemes to support employees’ 
fundraising for charities and good causes. 
In addition, our people donated £3.1 million 
to hundreds of charities and good causes 
across the UK, including £2.4 million through 
our award-winning payroll giving scheme. 

Our partnership with the Stroke Association 
ended during the reporting period. We raised 
£2 million for the charity, including matched 
giving. This will fund up to 10,000 grants for 
stroke survivors, to support their recovery. 
We also took over 15,000 blood pressure 
readings, to highlight the link between high 
blood pressure and stroke risk. 

We decided to focus on the theme of 
mental health for our subsequent charity 
partnership. This is an important issue 
for our business and in society in general. 
We will deliver an integrated programme with 
our new charity partner, Action for Children, 
covering mental health training, awareness-
raising, communications, pro-bono support, 
work placements and fundraising. Around 
36,000 colleagues voted for Action for 
Children as their preferred charity partner in 
our 2017 Employee Survey. 

The partnership has four key objectives: 

• 

to support our own colleagues’ 
mental health; 

•  drive awareness amongst customers 

and communities; 

• 

fundraise £2 million, including matched 
giving from Royal Mail, to enable the charity 
to support more young people; and 

•  engage our suppliers to raise awareness 

and support for the cause. 

Action for Children will use the funds we 
raise to employ specialist youth workers 
to deliver face-to-face support sessions 
for 8,000 young people aged 15-18, to help 
prevent them from developing depression 
and other mental health problems. 

Royal Mail partners with the charity Missing 
People to distribute missing people alerts 
through our network of handheld scanners, 
which are usually used to track and sign for 
deliveries. We sent our 100th alert during 
the year. We also funded the charity’s Child 
Rescue Alert system, which allows members 
of the public to sign up for alerts to their 
mobile phones. At Christmas, we sponsored 
a campaign to enable missing people to send 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  45

Royal Mail plc 

|  Corporate responsibility

a Message Home for free. We distributed 
10,000 freepost cards to help them take the 
first step in reconnecting with loved ones. 
Our partnership was recognised by two 
prestigious awards: the CorpComms Best 
Partnership award and PostEurop’s Coup 
de Coeur for Society award. CorpComms 
Awards judges said “This is a truly stand out 
partnership. It is extremely clever, relevant 
and built out of insight.” 

GLS is active in supporting community 
causes across Europe. In 2017, GLS 
Netherlands launched a partnership with 
Heppie, a charity that provides support 
to disadvantaged children. Through 
the partnership, GLS will fund around 
50 excursions a year for the children. 
GLS Belgium provided assistance to the 
Belgian deaf football team to transport 
their equipment to Italy for the European 
Deaf Football Championships. In Germany, 
GLS colleagues spread some festive cheer 
by donating 750 advent calendars to local 
children’s hospitals. 

Our environment 
We aim to minimise the environmental 
impact of our business operations. 
Management of natural resources is a 
commercial imperative too for us. Reducing 
our impact will help us save costs and 
compete more effectively. 

Our Environment Policy, which outlines our 
commitment to managing environmental 
issues, was revised during 2016-17. 

CO2e Emissions 
(’000 tonnes)2,3,4,5 

Scope 1

Scope 2

Scope 3

Total

The new policy can be accessed online at 
www.royalmailgroup.com/responsibility/ 
policies. We also developed a new suite 
of environmental standards in 2016-17, 
aligned to ISO140001. This is about enabling 
business units in our UK operations to 
identify environmental efficiencies and ensure 
we continue to meet legal obligations. 

The table below sets out our Group carbon 
dioxide equivalent (CO2e) emissions for 
2016-17. In 2016-17, our total UK carbon 
footprint decreased by 4.7 per cent compared 
with the previous year. On a normalised 
basis, emissions decreased by 4.6 per cent 
per £1 million revenue. Our target has been 
to reduce UKPIL carbon emissions (including 
Scopes 1, 2 and 3) by 20 per cent, by 2020-21, 
compared with a 2004-05 baseline. We have 
achieved our target at a time of significant 
change for our business. We are transforming 
from a letters company that delivers parcels, 
to a parcels company that delivers letters. 
We are having to accommodate more and 
bigger parcels than ever before. This places 
increasing demand on our fleet and fuel 
consumption. We have achieved our target by 
pursuing energy-saving opportunities across 
our fleet and property portfolio, exploring 
more efficient ways of balancing the air, rail 
and road transport that we use to deliver mail 
items, and training our employees in more 
energy-efficient behaviours. The target will 
remain in place until 2020-21. This means 
that we will aim to keep our carbon emissions 
at 20 per cent below the levels in 2004-05 
until 2020-21. This will be challenging. Parcel 

volumes are increasing, and demands on our 
vehicles and fuel consumption will continue 
to grow. 

Fleet emissions 
We have replaced air transport with road on 
several routes across the UK. This has helped 
us to reduce costs as well as associated 
carbon emissions. We trained over 13,500 
drivers in fuel efficient driving, and fitted 
telemetry technology in approximately 
2,900 vehicles. In total, 40 per cent of our 
fleet is now fitted with this technology. 
It promotes safer, more efficient driving 
styles. We also continue to trial vehicles 
that use low or zero-emission technology. 
In 2017-18, we will trial nine electric 
heavy goods vehicles at a central London 
Mail Centre. 

GLS is introducing more gas powered 
vehicles into its fleet, bringing the total 
number to 180. Almost 10 per cent of its fleet 
in Italy is gas-powered. 

Buildings emissions 
The size of our property portfolio makes 
reducing its energy use another key priority. 
During the year, we replaced inefficient 
fluorescent lights with new LED lights at 
15 of our UK sites, and lighting controls 
at a further 17 Mail Processing Units and 
Delivery Office sites. This will generate an 
expected electricity saving of 11 GWh per 
year. In addition, in 2016-17 we focused 
on reducing our use of gas across our UK 
estate. Our improved use of Building Energy 

2016-17

2015-161

2014-151 

Total

UKPIL

458.2

444.9

134.4

116.3

GLS

13.3

18.1

Total

UKPIL

473.7

458.4

152.2

134.1

GLS

15.3

18.2

Total

UKPIL

483.7

470.7

166.4

145.4

GLS 

13.0 

21.0 

87.7

87.7

88.7

88.7

100.1

100.1

680.3

648.9

31.4

714.6

681.2

33.4

750.1

716.1

34.0 

Tonnes CO2e per £1m revenue

Scope 2 (market-based)

40.3

84.7

14.3

26.0

40.7

88.8

14.1

26.6

92.2

1 Last year, we reported that we had achieved a 16.8 per cent reduction in carbon emissions against the baseline. However, we actually achieved a 22 per cent reduction. Carbon 
emissions figures have been restated here to ensure transparency. During 2016-17, we identified two issues that resulted in an overestimation of our carbon emissions for 
2015-16, and for 2014-15. Firstly, Parcelforce Worldwide road fleet emissions had been double counted in 2015-16 and 2014-15. Secondly, issues with gas meter billing resulted 
in some double counting during 2015-16. This means that we overestimated our total carbon emissions by 5.9 per cent in 2015-16 and 3.9 per cent in 2014-15. These issues have 
been rectified. Appropriate additional control steps have been included as part of the data collection and validation process to reduce the risk of misreporting in the future. 
Ernst & Young (EY) – who we engage to provide limited assurance of our annual Corporate Responsibility reports, including our carbon emissions data – checked the 
rectifications and the additional controls that were implemented. EY’s full assurance statement will be available in the 2016-17 Corporate Responsibility Report. 

2  We quantify and report our organisational greenhouse gas emissions according to the Defra Environmental Reporting Guidelines 2013 and have utilised the UK Government 
2014 Conversion Factors for Company Reporting in order to calculate carbon dioxide equivalent emissions from corresponding activity data. We have reported all material 
Scope 1 and Scope 2 emissions for which we consider ourselves responsible and exclude immaterial sources such as fugitive emissions from air conditioning in owned 
vehicles. Scope 3 emissions are included in UKPIL reporting only. 

3  We report our Scope 2 market-based carbon emissions in line with the Greenhouse Gas Protocol, which takes into account the use of lower carbon forms of energy such as 

renewables. Based on the total Scope 2 market-based figures in table above, our total carbon emissions in 2016–17 are 586.1 kilotonnes CO2e. 

4  Totals may differ due to rounding. 
5  CO2e emissions have been assured by EY, with the exception of 2015-16 Scope 2 (market-based) emissions. 

46 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

The Strategic Report was approved by the 
Board on 17 May 2017 and signed on its 
behalf by: 

Moya Greene 
Chief Executive Officer 
17 May 2017 

Matthew Lester 
Chief Finance Officer 
17 May 2017

Management Systems helped to reduce 
gas consumption by seven per cent in total, 
in sites where we have those systems. 

GLS’ sites in Barcelona, Vitoria and Zaragoza 
source 100 per cent of their electricity 
through a green tariff. These locations 
represent approximately 52 per cent of our 
parcel volumes in Spain. GLS plans to move 
all of its Spanish operations to this tariff by 
the end of 2017-2018. 

Waste and water management 
In 2016-17, 91 per cent of UK waste was 
diverted from landfill, four per cent more than 
our target of 87 per cent, using a combination 
of recycling and waste to energy initiatives. 
45 per cent of UK sites that reported waste 
this year, now do not send any waste to 
landfill. In addition, we recorded a reduction 
of four per cent in our use of water, 
exceeding our water reduction target of three 
per cent. During the year, we also set new 
waste-to-landfill and water reduction targets 
for the next three years. These are detailed in 
our 2016-17 Corporate Responsibility Report. 

Our suppliers 
In the UK, we contribute around £2.4 billion 
annually procuring goods and services from 
around 5,000 suppliers. Where commercially 
viable, we break contracts down into 
smaller lots to increase their attractiveness 
to small and medium sized enterprises. 
By making our tendering process accessible 
to businesses of all sizes, we significantly 
expand our options. We also widen the 
economic opportunities that our business 
creates. During 2016-17, we awarded over 
30 per cent of new contracts to SMEs. 

We are committed to ensuring suppliers 
to Royal Mail maintain high standards of 
social, ethical and environmental conduct. 
We expect UK suppliers to adhere to our 
Responsible Procurement Code. The Code 
requires suppliers to maintain high standards 
of social, ethical and environmental conduct, 
including complying with the Ten Principles of 
the United Nations Global Compact. Suppliers 
must also comply with our mail security 
procedures and our approach to anti-bribery 
and corruption. The Code is embedded into 
our tendering process for UK procurement 
and it is referenced in our contracts. We may 
terminate a contract if we identify that a 
supplier fails to comply with our Code. 
We delivered several training sessions 
for colleagues in our UK procurement 
team last year, covering various corporate 
responsibility issues. 

Ethical principles are embedded in the 
Partner Code used by GLS Germany. 
The Code requires transport partners 
working with GLS to adhere to principles 
relating to anti-bribery and corruption, 
and health and safety. 

Human rights 
We are committed to upholding and 
respecting human rights. In addition to 
obeying the laws, rules and regulations of 
every country in which we operate, we act in 
accordance with the UN Guiding Principles 
on Business and Human Rights. We support 
the United Nations Universal Declaration of 
Human Rights and the International Labour 
Organization Fundamental Conventions, 
covering freedom of association, the 
elimination of all forms of forced and 
compulsory labour, the abolition of child 
labour and the elimination of discrimination 
in the workplace. 

Royal Mail welcomes the introduction of the 
UK Government’s Modern Slavery Act. This 
requires businesses to publicly report any 
steps they are taking to guard against the 
occurrence of slavery and trafficking in their 
business operations. We will publish our 
formal Modern Slavery Act statement within 
the recommended timeframes. It will cover 
both UKPIL and GLS. 

Our commitment to human rights is 
embedded in our company-wide Corporate 
Responsibility Policy, our Responsible 
Procurement Code and our Business 
Standards, which set out the standards and 
behaviours we expect of our colleagues. 
Further information about our approach to 
human rights protection will be available in 
our 2016-17 Corporate Responsibility Report. 

Our taxation principles 
Our taxation strategy is published on 
our website, at the following address: 
www.royalmailgroup.com/responsibility/policies. 
We have published our taxation principles 
for a number of years. Our strategy provides 
further detail and transparency. Our approach 
remains the same. Royal Mail has a low risk 
appetite in relation to tax matters. We are 
committed to complying with all applicable 
tax laws and will make decisions in relation 
to tax with due regard to our reputation, 
integrity and status as a Group whose shares 
are listed on the London Stock Exchange. 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  47

Royal Mail plc 

|  Chairman’s introduction

Corporate governance 

Chairman’s introduction 

Index

Page 

Chairman’s introduction

Board of Directors 

Chief Executive’s Committee

Statement of corporate governance

Audit and Risk Committee report

Nomination Committee report

Pensions Committee report

Directors’ remuneration report

Directors’ report

48 

49 

52 

54 

59 

63 

64 

66 

84 

Dear Shareholder 
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to 
present Royal Mail’s corporate governance 
report, following my first full year as Chairman 
of your Company. Although it has been 
a year of considerable change and challenge, 
we continue to ensure we maintain the highest 
standards of governance and confirm that the 
Company has, once again, fully complied with 
the UK Governance Code 2014 throughout the 
year. We were delighted that Royal Mail was 
recognised in the Institute of Directors’ 2016 
Good Governance Report by being ranked 
in the top 10 of all FTSE 100 companies for 
corporate governance. The following pages 
in this report explain, in detail, the structure 
and processes in place to ensure excellent 
governance and sets out the operations of the 
Board’s primary committees. 

Our Board is committed to ensuring that it 
provides effective leadership and promotes a 
culture of uncompromising ethical standards 
based on honesty, integrity, openness and 
effective debate. As individuals, we believe 
that the highest standard of corporate 
governance is vitally important to the success 
of the business and will contribute to improve 
company performance as well as help the 
Board discharge its duties in the best interests 
of shareholders and for the long term success 
of the Company. The Board achieves this by 
requiring that good governance principles and 
practices are adhered to and are embedded 
throughout the Company. 

The Board reviews Royal Mail’s long‑term 
strategy and monitors, supports and, where 
required, challenges the executive team, 
whose role it is to manage the Company 
successfully day‑to‑day, driving performance 
and creating value for our shareholders 
and other stakeholders. I lead the Board 
and for it to be effective in discharging its 
responsibilities, a level of independence 
and objectivity is maintained to ensure we 
have the correct balance of experience and 
skills and have sufficient knowledge of the 
operations of the business. 

This year, the Board has devoted much of its 
attention to strategy, market changes and 
succession planning. Key discussions have 
been held around operational delivery, our 
business transformation and the associated 
business risks and their management. 

During the year, our Board saw changes 
to its composition with the retirement of 
Non‑Executive Director Nick Horler in 
February 2017, having served on the Board 
for almost seven years. We also welcomed 
Rita Griffin to the Board in December 2016 
as a Non‑Executive Director. Rita brings 
considerable knowledge developing and 
implementing strategies and leading 
substantial transformation programmes. 
As we have announced, further changes will 
take place with the stepping down of our 
Chief Finance Officer Matthew Lester at the 
conclusion of this year’s AGM. 

On 15 May 2017, we announced that Stuart 
Simpson, Director of Group Finance, will be 
appointed CFO and join the Royal Mail Board 
at the conclusion of the AGM on 20 July 2017. 
Stuart's appointment follows a comprehensive 
search that included both internal and 
external candidates. 

We continue to support and promote diversity 
within our business and Royal Mail employs 
a diverse mix of people that reflects the 
communities we serve. The Board is proud 
that we were listed as a top 20 company 
for senior leader gender diversity in the 
Hampton‑Alexander Review; an independent, 
Government supported review of diversity 
in FTSE 100 companies. Royal Mail has also 
been recognised as a Times Top 50 Employers 
for Women for the fourth consecutive year. 
We strongly believe that the business benefits 
from a diverse Board and Senior Management 
team in all aspects – not just gender – and this 
facilitates better collective decision‑making 
capacity. We will continue to promote diversity 
in its broadest sense. 

The Board carries out an evaluation of 
our own performance on an annual basis. 
Following an external evaluation facilitated 
by Independent Board Evaluation in 2015‑16, 
this year it was agreed that the annual 
evaluation would be carried out internally. 
The results found that our Board and each 
of the Board committees function very well 
and make an effective contribution and a 
strong commitment to the leadership and 
progression of the Group. The findings of the 
evaluation are discussed in more detail on 
page 57. 

Peter Long 
Chairman 
17 May 2017

48 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Board of Directors 

Peter Long  N* R 
Chairman 

Appointed to the Board: 
As Non‑Executive Director and Chairman 
designate on 18 June 2015. Peter became 
Chairman on 1 September 2015. 

Key areas of prior experience: 
Strategy, finance, transformation and 
consumer experience. 

Moya Greene  C* 
Chief Executive Officer 

Appointed to the Board: 
6 September 20131 

Key areas of prior experience: 
Postal sector, finance, retail, transport. 

Current external appointments: 
•  Trustee of Tate. 

Current external appointments: 
•  Member of TUI AG Supervisory Board. 

Previous relevant experience: 
•  Non‑Executive Director of Great‑West 

Lifeco Inc. 

Orna Ni‑Chionna A N R* 
Senior Independent Non‑Executive Director 

Appointed to the Board: 
20 September 20132 

Key areas of prior experience: 
Consumer focus, retail, strategy. 

Current external appointments: 
•  Chair of Client Service at 
Eden McCallum LLP. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Saga plc. 

•  Deputy Chairman of the National Trust. 

•  Non‑Executive Chairman of 

Countrywide plc. 

•  Non‑Executive Chairman of Parques 
Reunidos Servicios Centrales S.A.U. 

Previous relevant experience: 
Over 20 years’ experience in FTSE 100 
customer‑focused companies. 

•  Senior Independent Director of Rentokil 

Initial plc. 

•  Senior Independent Director of RAC plc. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Debenhams plc. 

•  Group Chief Executive of First Choice 

Holidays PLC. 

•  Chief Executive of TUI Travel PLC. 

•  Chief Executive of Sunworld. 

•  President and Chief Executive Officer of 

•  Trustee of Sir John Soane’s Museum. 

Canada Post Corporation. 

•  Assistant Deputy Minister for Transport 

Canada. 

•  Senior Vice President, and Chief 

Administration Officer, Retail Products, at 
Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce. 

•  Vice Chairman of Purolator Courier Ltd, 
a Canadian express parcel company. 

•  Senior Vice President for operational 

effectiveness at Bombardier. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Tim Hortons Inc. 
in Canada. Member of the Audit Committee, 
Human Resources Committee and 
Remuneration and Compensation Committee. 

•  Managing Director, Infrastructure Finance, 

Previous relevant experience: 
•  Partner at McKinsey & Company. 

•  Senior Independent Director of HMV plc, 

Northern Foods plc and BUPA. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Bank of Ireland. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of UK Holdings plc 

and Bristol & West plc.

2  Appointed Senior Independent Director of Royal Mail 

Holdings plc on 1 April 2011.

•  Chief Executive of International Leisure 

at TD Securities Inc. 

Group Travel Division. 

1  Appointed on 6 September 2013 to the Board of Royal 
Mail Limited, which changed its name to Royal Mail 
plc on 19 September 2013. 

Key to membership of Board Committees 

A – Audit and Risk Committee 

N – Nomination Committee 

P – Pensions Committee 

R – Remuneration Committee 

C – Chief Executive’s Committee 

* – Chair of the Committee 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  49

Royal Mail plc 

|  Board of Directors

Matthew Lester P C 
Chief Finance Officer 

Appointed to the Board: 
6 September 20133 

Rita Griffin A 
Non‑Executive Director 

Appointed to the Board: 
1 December 2016 

Cath Keers A N 
Non‑Executive Director 

Appointed to the Board: 
20 September 2013 

Key areas of prior experience: 
Finance, accounting, consumer goods, 
financial services. 

Key areas of prior experience: 
Marketing, finance, logistics, strategy, 
transformation. 

Current external appointments: 
•  Non‑Executive Director of Capita plc and 
Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee. 

Current external appointments: 
•  Chief Operating Officer, Global 
Petrochemicals at BP plc. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Shanghai 
SECCO Petrochemicals Limited. 

Previous relevant experience: 
•  Chief Marketing Officer, BP plc. 

•  Chief Operating Officer roles for several 

BP businesses including automotive fuels, 
aviation fuels, LPG, lubricants and retail. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Man Group plc 

and Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee. 

Previous relevant experience: 
•  Group Finance Director at ICAP plc. 

•  Group Financial Controller and Group 

Treasurer, Diageo plc. 

•  Main committee member of the 100 Group 
of Finance Directors and Chairman of its 
Investor Relations and Markets Committee. 

3  Appointed on 6 September 2013 to the Board of Royal 

Mail Limited, which changed its name to Royal Mail plc 
on 19 September 2013. Matthew Lester has informed 
the Board that it is his intention to leave the Company 
following the AGM on 20 July 2017. He will not stand for 
re‑election. On 15 May 2017, we announced that Stuart 
Simpson, Director of Group Finance, will be appointed 
CFO and join the Royal Mail Board at the conclusion of 
the AGM on 20 July 2017. 

Key areas of prior experience: 
Retail, consumer focus, digital. 

Current external appointments4: 
•  Non‑Executive Director of Talk Talk 

Group plc. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of the Insurance 
Group Liverpool Victoria Friendly Society 
Limited (LV=). 

•  Chairman of USTWO Fampany Limited. 

Previous relevant experience: 
•  Non‑Executive Director of Home Retail 

Group plc and Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee. 

•  Customer Director and Marketing Director 

of O2 UK. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Telefonica 

Europe. 

•  Various marketing, strategy and business 
development roles at Next plc, Sky plc, 
Avon Products and Thorn EMI. 

4  Appointed to Sage Group plc as Non‑Executive 

Director with effect from 1 July 2017.

Directors’ original appointment dates to the Board of a Royal Mail  
parent company 
This table shows the dates that the Directors were appointed to the Board of Royal Mail Holdings plc, 
the parent Company until 1 April 2012, and the Board of Royal Mail Group Limited, the parent Company 
until 12 September 2013. 

Director

Peter Long

Moya Greene

Orna Ni‑Chionna

Matthew Lester

Rita Griffin

Cath Keers

Paul Murray

Les Owen

Royal Mail Holdings plc

Royal Mail Group Limited 

N/A

15 July 2010

1 June 2010

24 November 2010

N/A

1 June 2010

1 August 2009

27 January 2010

N/A 

1 April 2012 

1 April 2012 

1 April 2012 

N/A 

1 April 2012 

1 April 2012 

1 April 2012

50 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Changes to the Board during the year 
•  Rita Griffin was appointed to the 

Royal Mail plc Board with effect from 
1 December 2016. 

•  Nick Horler retired from the Royal Mail plc 

Board on 28 February 2017. 

•  Matthew Lester has informed the 

Board that it is his intention to leave the 
Company following the AGM on 20 July 
2017. He will not stand for re‑election. 

•  On 15 May 2017, we announced that 
Stuart Simpson, Director of Group 
Finance, will be appointed CFO and join 
the Royal Mail Board at the conclusion of 
the AGM on 20 July 2017. 

There have been no other changes to the 
Board during the year.

Paul Murray A* N R P 
Non‑Executive Director 

Appointed to the Board: 
20 September 2013 

Key areas of prior experience: 
Finance, energy, technology. 

Current external appointments: 
•  Non‑Executive Director of Naked 

Energy Ltd. 

Les Owen A R P* 
Non‑Executive Director 

Appointed to the Board: 
20 September 2013 

Key areas of prior experience: 
Finance, pensions, insurance. 

Current external appointments: 
•  Non‑Executive Director of Computershare. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Discovery 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Qinetiq Group 
plc and Chair of the Audit Committee. 

Holdings, a South African listed health and 
life insurer. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Ventive Ltd. 

Previous relevant experience: 
•  Non‑Executive Director of Independent Oil 

and Gas plc. 

•  Senior Independent Director of Taylor 

Nelson Sofres plc. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Thomson SA 
and of Tangent Communications plc. 

•  Group Finance Director of Carlton 

Communications plc and LASMO plc. 

Previous relevant experience: 
•  Group Chief Executive Officer of AXA Asia 
Pacific Holdings Ltd., a member of the 
Global AXA Group Executive Board and 
responsible for AXA’s Asian Life Insurance 
and Wealth Management operations. 

•  Chief Executive Officer of AXA Sun Life plc. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Post Office 

Limited. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of Just Retirement 

Group plc. 

•  Non‑Executive Director of CPP Group plc. 

•  Non‑Executive Chairman of Jelf Group plc. 

Board and Committee attendance 
During the year, the Directors attended the following meetings of the Board and Committees. 

Board

Audit & Risk 
Committee 

Nomination 
Committee 

Pensions 
Committee 

Remuneration 
Committee 

Total number of meetings  8

6

Chairman 

Peter Long

Executive Directors 

Moya Greene

Matthew Lester

NonExecutive Directors 

Rita Griffin1

Nick Horler2

Cath Keers3

Paul Murray4

Orna Ni‑Chionna

Les Owen

8/8

8/8 

8/8

3/3

7/7

8/8

8/8

8/8

8/8

2/2 

3/5

5/6

6/6

6/6

6/6

3

3/3

2/3 

3/3 

1/1

3/3

3

3/3 

3/3

3/3

7 

7/7 

7/7 

7/7 

7/7 

1  Rita Griffin was appointed to the Board as a 

Non‑Executive Director on 1 December 2016. 

2  Nick Horler resigned as a Director of the Board on 

28 February 2017. He was unable to attend the Audit 
and Risk Committee on 24 August 2016 which was an 
ad hoc meeting, the Audit and Risk Committee and 
the Nomination Committee on 10 November 2016 due 
to prior business commitments. 

3  Cath Keers was unable to attend the Audit and Risk 
Committee on 22 March 2017 due to prior business 
commitments. 

4  Paul Murray was appointed to the Nomination 

Committee on 16 November 2016.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  51

Royal Mail plc 

|  Chief Executive’s Committee

Chief Executive’s Committee 

In addition to the Royal Mail plc Board, the Chief 
Executive’s Committee (CEC) manages the key 
strategies of the Group with an overall 
framework of financial risk and business controls 
to meet the needs of stakeholders. 

Moya Greene 
Chief Executive Officer 

Matthew Lester 
Chief Finance Officer 

Member of TopCo 

Member of TopCo 

see page 65. 

see page 65. 

See ‘Board of Directors’ on 

pages 49‑51. 

pages 49‑51. 

See ‘Board of Directors’ on 

Stephen Agar 
Managing Director, Consumer 
and Network Access 

Current role 
•  Appointed Managing Director, 

Consumer and Network Access in 
October 2011. 

•  Responsible for the regulated 
letters business (both USO and 
Access), Philatelic and Postcodes. 

Previous work history 
•  A barrister who started his 
career in the Government 
Legal Service before moving to 
Racal Electronics plc. 

•  Joined Royal Mail in 1991. 

Rico Back 
Chief Executive Officer, GLS 

Member of TopCo 

see page 65. 

Current role 
•  Appointed Chief Executive Officer 

of GLS in October 1999. 

Previous work history 
•  Founding manager of German 

Parcel in 1989, which was acquired 
by the Group in 1999. 

Jack Bertram 
Managing Director, Strategy, 
Pricing and Growth 

Current role 
•  Appointed Managing Director, 
Strategy, Pricing and Growth in 
January 2016. 

Previous work history 
•  Partner at McKinsey & 

Company focused on strategy, 
transformation and growth in 
travel, post and logistics sectors. 

Stephen Cameron 
UK Operations Director 

Maaike de Bie 
General Counsel 

Mick Jeavons 
Chief of Staff 

Current role 
•  Appointed UK Operations Director in 

Current role 
•  Appointed General Counsel in 

Current role 
•  Appointed Chief of Staff in 

March 2016. 

April 2016. 

June 2015. 

•  Previously appointed in August 
2015 as Deputy Chief Operations 
Officer alongside role as Operations 
Strategy Director. 

Previous work history 
•  Joined Royal Mail in 1985 and has 
worked across all aspects of the 
operation notably as Operations, 
Process and Programme Director 
and Territory Director. 

•  Successfully led the initial phase 
of Royal Mail’s comprehensive 
transformation programme 
across UK operations. 
•  Stephen is a Fellow of the 

Association of Project Managers. 

Previous work history 
•  Joined Royal Mail in January 2014 
and appointed Acting General 
Counsel in September 2015. 

•  Previously General Counsel for 
the EMEA division of GE Capital 
Commercial Distribution France, 
a financial services unit of the 
General Electric Company. 

•  Has held other senior international 

legal roles at the European 
Bank for Reconstruction and 
Development, Ernst & Young LLP 
and White & Case LLP. 

Previous work history 
•  Mick is a chartered accountant 

and has performed a wide range 
of senior roles in Royal Mail, most 
recently as Corporate Finance 
Director responsible for Group 
Investment, Procurement and 
the UK Finance teams. Previous 
to this he was Group Financial 
Controller and Finance Director of 
Group Property.

52 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Jon Millidge 
Group HR Director 

Current role 
•  Appointed Group HR Director in 

February 2014. 

•  Pension Scheme Trustee 
of the Royal Mail Defined 
Contribution Plan. 

Previous work history 
•  Joined Royal Mail in 1985 as a 

graduate and has worked across 
a number of the businesses within 
the Group. 

•  Previously Company Secretary 
from May 2010 to February 2014 
and prior to that was the Acting 
Group HR Director. 

Phil Morris 
Group Chief Technology Officer 

Current role 
•  Appointed Group Chief Technology 
Officer in April 2017, following his 
interim appointment as Group 
Chief Information Officer in 
May 2016. 

•  Appointed IT Director for Strategy, 
Architecture, Security and Service 
in January 2012. 

Previous work history 
•  Partnership at the PA 
Consulting Group. 

•  Managing Director for EquaTerra 

Europe and Asia. 

•  Executive Director for Morgan 

Chambers. 

Mike Newnham 
Managing Director, New Markets 
and Digital 

Current role 
•  Appointed Managing Director, 
New Markets and Digital in 
January 2017. 

•  Appointed Chief Customer Officer 

in March 2012. 

Shane O'Riordain 
Managing Director, Corporate 
Affairs, Regulation and 
Customer Experience 

Current role 
•  Appointed Managing Director, 
Corporate Affairs, Regulation 
and Customer Experience in 
December 2016. 

Previous work history 
•  Led the Consumer division of 

Orange UK. 

•  Prior to that held a number 
of executive board positions 
at Orange. 

Previous work history 
•  Appointed Managing Director, 

Communications, in November 
2010. Subsequently assumed 
responsibility for Strategy, 
Regulation and Pricing in 2014. 

•  Held a number of Group Corporate 
Affairs Director positions in the 
banking and financial sector at 
Lloyds Banking Group, HBOS, 
Halifax and Flemings. 

Stuart Simpson* 
Director, Group Finance 

Current role 
•  Appointed Director of Group 

Finance in July 2015. 

•  Joined the Royal Mail Group in 2009 
and was appointed as Deputy Chief 
Operations Officer in January 2014. 

Sue Whalley 
Chief Operations Officer 

Member of TopCo 

see page 65. 

Current role 
•  Joined Royal Mail in 2006 and was 
appointed Chief Operations Officer 
in January 2014. 

•  Prior to this, he was running 

•  Responsible for leading the next 

Operations for the West Region of 
the UK and was Finance Director of 
UK Operations. 

Previous work history 
•  Worked in the automotive industry 
for 15 years with senior roles in 
Finance and Strategy, the last 10 of 
which were based outside the UK. 

*  On 15 May 2017, we announced that 
Stuart Simpson, Director of Group 
Finance, will be appointed CFO and join 
the Royal Mail Board at the conclusion 
of the AGM on 20 July 2017. 

phase of the transformation in the 
UK core business, with specific 
focus on further development of 
safety, quality, efficiency, culture 
and innovation. 

•  Previously, as Regulation and 

Government Affairs Director, led 
the programme for privatisation. 

Previous work history 
•  Consultant at McKinsey & 

Company for 17 years, the last six 
of which were as a partner in the 
London office.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  53

Royal Mail plc 

|  Statement of corporate governance

Statement of corporate governance 

Compliance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code, September 2014, 
and its statement of requirements 
The UK Corporate Governance Code 2014 
(Code) applied to the 2016‑17 financial year. 
The following sections explain how the 
Company applies the main principles set out 
in the Code, issued by the Financial Reporting 
Council (FRC), as required by the Listing 
Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority 
(FCA), and how it meets other relevant 
requirements, including the provisions of the 
Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the 
FCA. Both Codes are publically available at 
the website of the FRC (www.frc.org.uk). 

The Board considers that the Company 
complied with the full provisions of the Code 
during the year. 

Board leadership 
The Board 
The Board is responsible for the stewardship 
of the Company and overseeing its conduct 
and affairs to create sustainable value for the 
benefit of its stakeholders. 

The Board is committed to ensuring that it 
provides effective leadership and promotes 
uncompromising ethical standards, setting 
the tone for the Company. All its members 
have the knowledge, talent and experience to 
perform the functions required of a Director 
of the business. 

At the end of the year, the Board of Royal Mail 
plc comprised the Chairman, two Executive 
Directors and five Non‑Executive Directors. 
Prior to their appointment as Directors of 
the Company, each of the Directors, with the 
exception of Peter Long and Rita Griffin, had 
been a Director of Royal Mail Group Limited. 
The biographies of each of the Directors, 
setting out their current roles, commitments 
and previous experience, are on pages 49‑51. 

The Board holds regular scheduled meetings 
throughout the year. The Board met eight 
times during the year. 

The division of responsibilities between the 
Chairman and the Chief Executive Officer is 

fully documented. A summary is set out on 
page 55. 

During the financial year, the Non‑Executive 
Directors and the Chairman met on a 
number of occasions without the Executive 
Directors being present. These meetings are 
an important way to develop the working 
relationships between the Non‑Executive 
Directors and to assess the performance 
of senior management. In addition, the 
Senior Independent Director met with 
the Non‑Executive Directors to assess 
the Chairman’s performance without the 
Chairman being present. 

Executive Directors have rolling 12‑month 
contracts and Non‑Executive Directors are 
generally appointed for three year terms. 

In accordance with the requirements of 
the Code, copies of the Directors’ service 
contracts and letters of appointment for 
the Non‑Executive Directors are available 
for inspection at the Company’s registered 
office during normal office hours and by the 
shareholders at each AGM for a period of 
15 minutes prior to the commencement of 
the meeting and also during the meeting. 

Role of the Board 
The Board is responsible for setting the 
objectives and strategy for the Group and 
for monitoring its performance and risk 
management. The Board has adopted 
matters reserved for the Board setting out its 
duties and obligations and has defined those 
matters that are reserved exclusively for its 
consideration. These include the approval 
of strategic plans, financial statements, 
acquisitions and disposals, major contracts, 
projects and capital expenditure. 

Board focus 
Some of the key areas of focus during the 
year were as follows (a number of these 
areas are also considered by the Board 
Committees): 

•  productivity and efficiency of the 

operations; 
future technology; 
• 
the Board's composition; 
• 
•  key stakeholder relations; 
•  Group’s financial performance, including 

the management of share plans; 

•  human resources updates; 
•  Group’s property portfolio; and 
•  health and safety. 

Key areas of focus for the next year: 

•  Group’s strategy; 
•  revenue growth opportunities; 
• 
technological developments; 
•  digitisation of Royal Mail; 
•  composition of the Board; 
•  succession planning and talent pipeline; 
•  security, including cyber risk and data 

protection; and 
•  health and safety. 

Independence of Directors 
The Board reviews the independence of its 
Non‑Executive Directors as part of its Annual 
Board Effectiveness review. 

The Board considers that each of the 
Non‑Executive Directors is independent. 
This means that, in the view of the Board, 
they have no links to the Executive Directors 
and other managers and no business or other 
relationship with the Company that could 
impact their judgement. 

Shareholder relations 
Communication with shareholders is 
given high priority. The full Annual Report 
and Financial Statements is sent to all 
shareholders who wish to receive one. 
Presentations are given following the 
announcements of the half year and full year 
results, which are available to watch live and 
on replay on our website. All information on 
our activities, published financial results and 
the Annual Report and Financial Statements 
can be found on our Company website 
www.royalmailgroup.com. 

•  Group’s strategy, structure and viability; 
•  compliance and regulation; 
•  revenue growth in the core businesses as 

well as new areas; 

The AGM is used to communicate with all 
investors and the Board welcomes their 
participation.

54 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

as well as standing reports on Health and 
Safety, Regulation, Market Dynamics and 
from the Company Secretary. In addition, the 
Directors have access to an online reference 
manual to support them in the performance 
of their duties. The Directors receive regular 
updates and training on developments in 
matters such as corporate governance and 
compliance. These processes enable the 
Company to comply with the provisions of 
the Code requiring the timely provision of 
information to Directors. 

Risk management and 
internal controls 
The Board is responsible for maintaining a 
risk management and internal control system 
and for managing principal risks faced by 
the Group. This is described in more detail 
in the Audit and Risk Committee report on 
pages 59‑63. 

There is regular dialogue with our 
institutional shareholders. The Chairman and 
the Senior Independent Director (SID) are 
also available to consult with shareholders. 

The Board regularly receives an update 
on interaction with investors and 
shareholders to ensure that the Board has 
an understanding of their views. In addition, 
the SID provides a point of contact for those 
shareholders who wish to raise issues with 
the Board, other than through the Chairman. 

Board information 
The Board receives business and financial 
performance reports at each Board meeting 

Board roles 

Chairman 
Peter Long 

Key responsibilities 
•  Leads the Board 
•  Promotes the highest standard of 

corporate governance 

Senior Independent Director 
Orna Ni‑Chionna 

Key responsibilities 
•  Provides a sounding board for the 

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer 

•  Leads the annual appraisal of the 

•  Sets its agenda and ensures that Directors 

Chairman’s performance 

•  Acts as a trusted intermediary through 
which Non‑Executive Directors can 
express their views or concerns 
•  Available to meet with shareholders 
should they have issues or concerns 

receive accurate, timely and clear 
information with adequate time available 
for discussion of all agenda items 
•  Builds an effective and complementary 

Board, including effective contribution and 
sufficient challenge from the Directors 
•  Ensures effective communications with 
shareholders and makes the Directors 
aware of their views 

•  Ensures the Board determines the nature 
and extent of the significant risks that 
the Company is willing to embrace in 
implementing its strategy 

Non‑Executive Directors 
Rita Griffin 
Cath Keers 
Paul Murray 
Les Owen 

Key responsibilities 
•  Constructively challenge Management 
•  Help develop strategy 
•  Scrutinise Management’s performance 
•  Satisfy themselves on the integrity 
of financial information and on the 
effectiveness of financial controls and risk 
management systems 

•  Determine the appropriate level of 

remuneration for Executive Directors 

Chief Executive Officer 
Moya Greene 

Chief Finance Officer 
Matthew Lester* 

Company Secretary 
Kulbinder Dosanjh 

Key responsibilities 
•  Has day‑to‑day responsibility for 
managing the Group’s operations 

•  Makes decisions on matters affecting the 
operations, performance and strategy 

•  Provides leadership and direction to 

senior management 

•  Coordinates all activities to implement 
strategy for managing the business in 
accordance with the Group’s risk appetite 
and business plan set by the Board 

•  Promotes the Company’s culture 

and standards 

Key responsibilities 
•  Supports the Chief Executive Officer 
and leads on the financial and risk 
management of the Group 

•  Develops the financial and operational 

strategy and the metrics tied to 
that strategy 

•  Develops and monitors control systems 

designed to preserve company assets and 
report accurate financial results 

*  On 15 May 2017, we announced that Stuart Simpson, 
Director of Group Finance, will be appointed CFO and 
join the Royal Mail Board at the conclusion of the AGM 
on 20 July 2017.  

Key responsibilities 
•  Provides advice on corporate governance 
issues and ensures all statutory and 
regulatory requirements are met 
•  Acts as a secretary to the Board and 

its Committees 

•  Maintains and ensures efficiency 
of the Company’s and Board’s 
governance framework 

•  Organises Directors’ induction and training 
•  Ensures good information flows and 
comprehensive practical support is 
provided to the Board 

•  Communicates with shareholders 
ensuring due regard is paid to 
their interests 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  55

Royal Mail plc 

|  Statement of corporate governance

Board diversity 
Diversity, including professional, international 
and ethnic diversity, is a key factor when 
assessing the Board’s composition. 
It ensures there is the correct balance of 
skills, experience and expertise amongst 
Non‑Executive Directors so they can lead 
decision making and assess the performance 
and strategy of the Company. 

The Board has adopted a Board Diversity 
Policy to ensure transparency and 
diversity in making appointments to 
the Board on the recommendation of 
the Nomination Committee. This policy 
expresses the commitment to principles 
of non‑discrimination against protected 
characteristics1 and the promotion of fair 
participation and equality of opportunity 
for all. The Board assesses whether it is 
compliant with that policy through its Board 
effectiveness review. The Board has also 
adopted within this policy a process for 
Board appointments (including procedures 
for appointing a new Chairman) where an 
appointment becomes necessary following 
a resignation or additional characteristics 
are identified as necessary during the Board 
effectiveness review. 

The gender balance of the Board is also 
taken into consideration when recruiting a 
new Non‑Executive Director. This is reflected 
by the current composition of the Board. 
We are one of the few companies in the 
FTSE 100 that has a female Chief Executive 

Board diversity at 26 March 2017 

Officer and at 26 March 2017, three of the 
six (50 per cent) Non‑Executive Directors, 
including the SID, were also female. The 
Committee does not feel that it is appropriate 
to set a quota regarding the number of 
women on the Board. But, we will look to 
maintain a strong representation of women 
on the Board. 

The Board believes that there are significant 
benefits to both the Group and the 
individual when Executive Directors accept 
Non‑Executive directorships from companies 
outside the Group. The Board’s approach is 
normally to limit Executive Directors to one 
Non‑Executive directorship, for which the 
Director may retain the fees. 

See pages 44 and 45 for further 

information on diversity. 

Board terms of appointment 
Time commitments 
The terms of appointment for the 
Non‑Executive Directors require them to 
devote a minimum of two days a month to 
working for the Company. In practice, they 
tend to devote more time than the stated 
minimum requirement. 

The Non‑Executive Directors were required 
to declare any of their other significant 
commitments prior to their appointment. 
The Board is informed of any subsequent 
changes as and when they arise. The 
Company announces to the London Stock 
Exchange any changes to their directorships 
on the boards of other publicly quoted 
companies. The Board is also informed 
of any non‑publicly quoted appointments 
and assesses external appointment levels 
to ensure the Board members are not too 
thinly spread. 

External appointments 
Peter Long’s Directorships (listed in his 
biography on page 49) qualify as his other 
significant commitments for the purposes 
of the Companies Act 2006. These were 
discussed on his appointment to the Board 
and during this financial year. The Board has 
considered the time commitment required 
of the Chairman’s role and believes that 
Peter Long continues to lead and support 
the Board and demonstrates the appropriate 
time commitment required. The Board 
considers that there is no impact on his role 
or performance as Chairman as a result of 
his external directorships. 

Matthew Lester was appointed as a 
Non‑Executive Director of Capita plc 
on 1 March 2017, bringing his external 
appointments to two. This is not the 
Company’s usual Policy but, as Matthew 
announced his intention to leave after the 
AGM in July 2017, the Board approved 
Matthew’s appointment to Capita plc. 

Board composition 

Gender balance 

Experience 

Non‑Executive Directors 

Executive Directors 

Chairman 

Male 

Female 

62% 

25% 

13% 

50% 

50% 

Retail and marketing 

Finance 

 Public utilities

Accounting 

Logistics

32% 

26%

10% 

16% 

16%

1  Race, colour, ethnic origin, nationality, disability, marital or civil partner status, sexual orientation, pregnancy or maternity, age, religion or belief (including political opinion in 

Northern Ireland), sex and gender reassignment.

56 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Conflicts of interest 
The Companies Act 2006 and the Articles 
require the Board to consider any potential 
conflicts of interest. The Board considers 
the conflicts during the financial year and, 
if appropriate, authorises each Director’s 
reported actual and potential conflicts of 
interest regularly. The conflicts of interest 
register was reviewed several times during 
the year by the Board. It concluded that 
Directors’ conflicts had been appropriately 
authorised and that the process for 
authorisation was operating effectively. 
Each Director abstains from approving their 
own reported potential conflicts. The Board 
operates a policy to identify and, where 
appropriate, manage potential conflicts of 
interest for Directors. The Board will continue 
to monitor the status of each conflict and will 
review potential conflicts of interest and take 
action to mitigate them as necessary. 

Related parties 
Internal controls are in place to ensure 
Directors advise the Board of any related 
party transactions involving themselves or 
their connected persons and that these are 
conducted at an arm’s length basis. Directors 
have an ongoing obligation to advise any 
changes which would be reviewed and 
monitored by the Board. As at 26 March 
2017, no Director had advised the Board of 
any related party transactions. Note 26 on 
page 131 sets out the Group’s related party 
transactions. 

Director induction and training 
The Chairman and Company Secretary 
are responsible for the induction of 
new Directors. They participate in a 
comprehensive induction programme 
following appointment to the Board. 
This is tailored to each Director. It includes 
face‑to‑face meetings with management and 
operational site visits to understand the key 
strategies and risks of the business. 

Ongoing training is also provided to the Board 
and additional training is available on request 
and where appropriate. 

The Board is also kept up to date with legal, 
regulatory and governance matters by the 
Company Secretary at each Board meeting. 

Board Committees and 
governance structure 
The Board has delegated authority to the 
Committees to carry out certain tasks. This is 
defined in each Committee’s respective terms 
of reference. The Committees established 
by the Board are shown in the Board 
Committees diagram above. 

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Board Committees 

Royal Mail plc 

Audit and Risk 
Committee 

Nomination 
Committee 

Pensions 
Committee 

Remuneration 
Committee 

Chief  
Executive's 
Committee 

For 2016‑17, the effectiveness reviews were 
conducted internally in February 2017 via 
online questionnaires and, for the Board, 
through individual discussions with each 
Director. The Senior Independent Director, 
Orna Ni‑Chionna, conducted the evaluation 
of the Chairman’s performance through both 
a questionnaire and individual discussions 
with Directors. The results of the evaluation 
exercises were reviewed by the Board and 
Committees in March and April 2017. Having 
completed the effectiveness reviews, the 
Directors are satisfied that the Board and 
each of its Committees operated effectively 
during 2016‑17. 

For the Board and each of its Committees, 
the Directors agreed areas of focus for the 
forthcoming year which would strengthen the 
performance of the Board overall, as set out 
below. Opportunities to review these topics in 
depth have been built into the 2017‑18 Board 
and Committee programme.

The minutes of each Committee meeting 
are made available to Directors on a timely 
basis. In addition, the Chair of each of the 
Board Committees reports to the Board on 
matters discussed at Committee meetings 
and highlights any significant issues requiring 
the Board’s attention. 

Board and Committee  
evaluations 
In accordance with the Code and recognising 
the significant benefits, the effectiveness of 
the Board, its Committees, Chairman and 
Directors are reviewed annually. This is 
facilitated by an independent third party at 
least once every three years. Last year, we 
engaged Independent Board Evaluation to 
conduct an external evaluation of the Board 
and the Remuneration Committee. The other 
Committees, the Chairman and the Directors 
reviews were conducted internally. 

For 2015‑16, the effectiveness reviews for 
the Board and the Remuneration Committee 
were conducted by Independent Board 
Evaluation, who also conducted individual 
interviews with each Board member and 
other relevant stakeholders. The evaluation 
for the Audit and Risk Committee was 
undertaken by way of an online questionnaire 
facilitated by Thinking Board® and internal 
evaluations were carried out for the 
Nomination and Pensions Committees. 
Following these reviews, it was concluded 
that the Board and its Committees were 
effective and an action list, focusing on 
strategy, succession and Director induction 
and training was developed and completed 
during 2016‑17. 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  57

Royal Mail plc 

|  Statement of corporate governance

Board

Key areas of focus for 2017‑18 

• 

• 

to continue to progress the Board Succession Plan for both Executive and Non‑Executive 
directors and ensure smooth succession plan for the executive directors; 

to ensure adequate time is spent on labour issues as part of the business transformation 
agenda of the core network and ensure sufficient time is given to growth opportunities in 
the UK; 

•  with regards the expansion of GLS’ geographic footprint, to ensure full Board support is 

provided to Management on the execution of this strategic priority; and 

• 

to explore more deeply what ‘digital’ means for the Royal Mail Group and its relevance for 
its customers. 

Audit and Risk Committee

•  provide full support to ensure the successful transition to the new Director of Internal Audit 

and Risk Management; 

•  continue to focus on the Group’s risk appetite and the risk framework with in‑depth reviews 
into specific areas that might materially impact the delivery of the Group’s strategy; and 

• 

introduce an enhanced training programme to complement the induction programme for 
new directors to widen their knowledge both from a corporate governance/regulatory 
perspective and to give depth to their knowledge of the Group. 

Remuneration Committee

•  ensure greater transparency by the Committee of the senior management team and review 

the remuneration strategy for the broader Royal Mail management; and 

• 

introduce regular formal training sessions into the annual meeting cycle to 
understand emerging governance themes, legislation changes and other trends in 
remuneration matters. 

Nomination Committee

•  support the Board in delivering the Board Succession Plan for both the Executive and 

Non‑Executive Directors; and 

• 

talent and succession planning across the senior leadership group as well as for the Board, 
ensuring sufficient time can be afforded to the succession planning programme across 
the Group. 

Pensions Committee

•  continue to fully understand the broader pension developments and ensure full awareness 

at Board level; 

•  provide relevant pensions training to both the Board and the Committee; 

•  complete the 2018 Pension Review; and 

•  determine appropriate future investment strategy for the pensions within the Group.

58 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Audit and Risk  
Committee report 

Dear Shareholder, 
The Audit and Risk Committee (ARC) has 
two fundamental responsibilities which 
inform the work we do as a Committee of 
independent Directors. The first is to review 
and recommend for approval by the Board 
all financial statements and associated 
disclosures. The second is to continually 
satisfy ourselves that internal controls and 
risk management processes put in place by 
the management team are working effectively. 
The Committee receives independent 
assurance from the Group’s Internal Audit (IA) 
and Risk Management (RM) function. It also 
receives regular reports from the Compliance 
function as well as the external auditor, KPMG, 
across a wide range of issues in support of 
their respective oversight responsibilities. 

The Committee is further supported by 
the Risk Management Committee (RMC), 
a management committee of the Chief 
Executive’s Committee with a reporting line 
to the ARC. The RMC’s key responsibilities 
are to drive the monitoring, identification and 
management of key risks in the organisation. 
During the year, the Committee considered 
the selection criteria and approved the 
appointment of the new Director of Internal 
Audit and Risk Management. 

Alongside myself, the members of the 
Committee are all independent Non‑Executive 
Directors – Orna Ni Chionna, Rita Griffin, 
Cath Keers and Les Owen. Nick Horler was 
a member of the Committee until he retired 
from the Board at the end of February 2017. 
The number of Committee meetings held 
during 2016‑17 and Committee members’ 
attendance is set out on page 51. 

Meetings of the Committee were also attended, 
where relevant, by the Chairman of the Board, 
the Chief Executive Officer, the Chief Finance 
Officer, the Director of Internal Audit and 
Risk Management, the Company Secretary, 
other members of senior management and 

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

representatives from the external auditor, 
KPMG. The Board considers that a number of 
the members of the Committee have recent 
and relevant financial experience, in particular 
myself, Rita Griffin and Les Owen. 

During the year, the Committee continued 
to challenge the assumptions and 
judgements made by the management 
team in determining the half year and full 
year financial results of the Company and 
to assess the appropriateness of their 
disclosure in the financial statements. 

The Committee has continued to consider the 
assessment and supporting papers provided by 
management in relation to the Group’s longer 
term viability statement and the increased 
focus on risk management and internal 
controls. We have reviewed the Group Risk 
Profile at each of our meetings, with particular 
focus on risks where likelihood or impact had 
changed, along with their supporting action 
plans to manage those risks. We paid particular 
attention to changes in employment tax; parcels 
competition; regulatory stance; GLS expansion; 
digitisation of Royal Mail and data loss, 
(see Principal Risks pages 37‑41). 

The Statutory Audit Services for Large 
Companies Market Investigation 
(Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender 
Processes and Audit Committee 
Responsibilities) Order 2014 

We have complied fully throughout the 
year with the Statutory Audit Services 
Order 2014 issued by the Competition and 
Markets Authority. 

Paul Murray 
Chair, Audit and Risk Committee 
17 May 2017 

Audit and Risk Committee Terms 
of Reference 
The full Terms of Reference for the 
Committee can be found on our website 
www.royalmailgroup.com/ 
about‑us/management‑committees/ 
audit‑and‑risk‑committee. 

Key areas of focus during the year 
Matters the Committee considered during the 
year include: 

•  financial reporting, particularly in 

considering information presented by 
Management on significant accounting 
judgements and policies adopted in respect 
of the Company’s half year and full year 
results and the assessment of whether the 
Annual Report and Financial Statements 
were fair, balanced and understandable. 
A paper considering the Financial 

Reporting Council's current areas of focus 
has been considered; 

•  risk reviews, management and internal 

control, receiving regular updates from IA 
and RM on the results of their reviews and 
the introduction of a strengthened risk and 
control self assessment process; 

•  continued compliance with the Code, 
including the longer term viability 
statement; 

•  compliance framework, including 

receiving quarterly updates from the 
Group Compliance team on areas within 
their oversight; 

• 

technology, including progress of 
the ongoing major transformation 
programme, the cyber risks facing the 
business and the risks associated with 
data protection; 

• 

the annual evaluation of the Committee’s 
effectiveness; 

•  Group taxation, governance, policy 

and risk; 

• 

the consideration of the selection criteria 
for the new Director of Internal Audit and 
Risk Management and the approval of 
their appointment; and 

•  external auditor and audit process review. 

Key areas of focus for next year 
•  evolving practice in external reporting; 

•  assurance mapping across the Group; and 

•  prioritised risk reviews. 

Meeting cycle and agenda items 
The Committee has a meeting planner, 
approved once a year, which provides a 
framework for each meeting agenda. 

During 2016‑17, the Committee met six times. 

• 

• 

two meetings mainly focused on the half 
year and full year results; and 

four meetings mainly focused on internal 
audit and risk management. 

All regular meetings contain elements of both 
financial reporting and internal audit and risk 
management, with reports from the Director 
of Group Finance and the Director of IA and 
RM being standing items on all agendas.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  59

Royal Mail plc 

|  Statement of corporate governance

Reliance on external and in house experts 
The Group’s actuary, Willis Towers Watson 
Limited, provides expert opinion and long 
term assumption advice with respect to 
pension accounting. Aon Limited provides 
similar expertise in relation to other long 
term liabilities. The Committee has concluded 
that these companies have the necessary 
expertise and resources. 

The Committee also relies on the advice and 
information provided by the General Counsel 
with respect to specific provisions and other 
contingent liabilities 

The external auditor had full access to these 
experts and, using their own actuarial and 
statistical experts, was able to provide further 
assurance to the Committee on these matters. 

The Committee is satisfied that the General 
Counsel has, or has access to, the relevant 
necessary expertise and resources and 
that the company conducting the statistical 
surveys also has the relevant necessary 
expertise and resources. 

Key activity in relation to the financial statements 
The main areas of focus for the Committee during the year in relation to the financial statements were: 

One‑off matters considered due to their materiality or nature 

Matter considered

What the Committee did 

Ofcom investigation 
(Contingent liability, see Note 25 on page 130) 
An Ofcom investigation was launched in February 2014, following a complaint 
brought by TNT Post UK (now Whistl), relating to certain Contract Change Notices 
issued by the Group in January 2014. As part of that investigation, on 28 July 2015, 
the Group received a Statement of Objections setting out Ofcom’s provisional, 
preliminary findings of anti‑competitive conduct. 

Following the receipt of the Statement of Objections, the Committee sought detailed 
background information from General Counsel and an assessment of accounting 
treatment from Management. 

We reviewed and challenged Management’s assessment of the issue with reference 
to the accounting standards. 

We concluded that it is appropriate to treat this issue as a contingent liability. 
The Committee have reviewed and approved the wording of its disclosure. 

Ongoing matters considered due to their materiality and/or the application of judgement 

Advance customer payments (£289 million, see Note 19 on page 122) 

Included within Advance customer payments is an estimate of the amounts of 
stamps and meter credits that have been sold but not used prior to the reporting 
date. At March 2017, this estimate totalled £240 million (March 2016 £252 million). 

Although the relevant survey and extrapolation is conducted by an independent 
company, the level at which a stamp holding is considered to be abnormal, and 
therefore excluded from the estimate, is a judgement made by Management. 
This judgement impacts revenue, profit and net assets. 

Royal Mail Defined Benefit Pension Surplus 
(£3,839 million, see balance sheet and Note 9 on page 108) 
The valuation of the pension liabilities relies on the estimation of long term 
assumptions such as RPI/CPI and mortality. Small movements in these 
assumptions can lead to material impacts on the balance sheet. 

In view of the complexity of accounting for pension schemes, significant focus 
is required on the associated disclosure to ensure that it is fair, balanced and 
understandable. 

Industrial diseases claims provision 
(£84 million, see Note 22 on page 128) 
The Group is liable for claims brought by employees (past and current) and by 
individuals who were employed in the General Post Office Telecommunications 
division and whose employment ceased prior to October 1981. The provision covers 
the estimate of claims that could be received over the next 25‑35 years. Changes to 
the provision will impact the income statement and net assets. 

Impact of changing employment legislation 
(see Principal Risks on page 40) 
The Group has a large workforce and changes to laws and regulations relating to 
employment can have a significant effect on the Group’s results. 

We continued to review and challenge the outcome from the statistical survey at 
the half year and full year, along with the judgement made by Management as to 
the level at which a stamp holding is considered abnormal. We compared the level 
of deferred income recognised by Management at each reporting date to ensure a 
consistent application. Separately, the auditor used their own experts to review the 
statistical processes and assess the judgemental assumption. We concluded that 
the level of deferred revenue remained appropriate. 

Key long term assumptions were prepared by the Group’s actuary, Willis Towers 
Watson Limited, and benchmarked to prevailing economic indicators and other 
large pension schemes. The assumptions were reviewed and approved by the 
Pensions Committee (see Report on page 64). All of these assumptions are 
disclosed in Note 9 to the financial statements. Changes in the assumptions were 
summarised for the Committee and explanations provided for the returns on 
scheme assets, particularly as a result of the liability hedging strategy. 

The auditor used their own independent actuarial experts to confirm that the 
assumptions used were reasonable and appropriate. 

To determine whether the level of provisioning in the balance sheet was reasonable, 
the Committee examined reports from Management and estimates of the gross 
provision (including the number of claims incurred but not received and the 
associated expected cash outflow, undiscounted) calculated by Aon Limited. 
The discount factor used by Aon, as advised by Management, to calculate the 
present value of the provision was validated against applicable bond rates. 

We received KPMG’s comments on the assumptions and the calculation used to 
reach the discounted provision and concluded that the approach taken to setting the 
provision continued to be appropriate. 

Throughout the year, the Committee received regular updates on relevant 
employment law cases from the General Counsel along with impact assessments 
of judgements on the Group. 

In light of the legal updates, we examined reports prepared by Management to 
determine whether their interpretation of the potential liabilities for the Group 
was appropriate. 

We concluded that these potential liabilities were accounted for appropriately based 
on the legal assessments provided by the General Counsel. 

Accounting for acquisitions 
(See Note 10 on page 114) 
The Group made a number of acquisitions during the year including ASM in June and 
GSO in October. IFRS 3 requires the purchase price to be allocated between Tangible 
assets, Intangible assets and Goodwill. 

The Committee examined reports from Management and the calculations of the fair 
values of assets acquired prepared by BDO. 

We received KPMG’s comments on the assumptions and the calculation used to 
calculate the fair value of assets acquired and concluded that the approach taken 
was appropriate. 

60 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Audit Committee effectiveness 
An internal evaluation was carried out in 
2016‑17 and is discussed in greater detail on 
page 57. 

Effectiveness of the external audit process 
Following their appointment as external 
auditor in July 2015, KPMG and Management 
have worked closely and the transition has 
been successful. Meetings between the 
senior audit team and Finance have been 
held at least monthly, giving the opportunity 
for any concerns to be raised and addressed 
on a timely basis. KPMG’s 2016 Audit Quality 
Inspection Report has also been discussed. 

The Committee received a report on the 
areas of audit risk identified by KPMG and 
approved their proposed audit approach. 
The Committee also reviewed and approved 
the respective engagement letters for the 
statutory and regulatory audits. 

At the end of the half year review and year 
end statutory audit, the Committee received 
reports from KPMG covering significant 
issues identified and discussed during the 
audit visits. In addition KPMG presented 
updates on their data and analytics approach, 
and their control findings. These reports were 
compared with the matters that Management 
had identified, to ensure consistency. 
The Committee also held regular private 
meetings with the external auditor. 

The formal evaluation of the external 
audit process is being addressed using an 
online questionnaire. The first part was 
completed shortly before our full year 
results announcement and responses were 
sought from individuals who had been 
closely involved in the audit (predominantly 
IT, Finance and HR) as well as Executive 
Directors and audit partners. 

The results of the online questionnaire will 
be supplemented with a further survey 
following the conclusion of the year end audit 
and will focus on the execution of the audit; 
the preparedness of the business; sufficiency 
of resources; communication and interaction; 
and overall satisfaction. 

While the outcome of the second survey 
will not be available until after the signing of 
the financial statements, the feedback from 
the first survey and the review of reports 
presented by Management and KPMG to 
their May 2017 meeting have enabled the 
Committee to conclude that there has been 
appropriate focus on the primary areas of 
audit risk and KPMG have applied robust 
challenge and scepticism throughout. 

Safeguarding the independence and 
objectivity of the external auditor 
The Committee has a policy in respect of non 
audit work which requires Management to 
seek pre approval prior to the engagement of 
the external auditor for the provision of any 
non audit services. This is to ensure that the 
level of fees earned from non audit services 
and the type of services provided do not impair 
the external auditor’s independence and 
objectivity. In general, the external auditor is 
not approached to perform non audit work. 
However, the auditor may be engaged to 
perform non audit services if they are uniquely 
placed to undertake them, or if the performance 
of the non audit services will support a future 
statutory audit (including the provision of 
buyer assist due diligence). The engagement 
may follow a competitive tender process. 
The Committee currently permits the external 
auditor to provide non audit services in respect 
of audit related services, tax services and 
other services insofar as permitted by auditor 
independence rules. The Committee has 
delegated authority to the Chief Finance Officer 
to pre‑approve assignments up to £25,000, 
with an annual limit of £500,000. 

During the year, KPMG have been engaged 
to provide financial due diligence and review 
the conversion of UK subsidiary accounts 
to FRS 101. Total fees earned for non audit 
services during 2016‑17 were £508,000 
which represented around 23 per cent of 
the external audit fee. In addition to the 
fees earned from the Company, KPMG has 
been engaged by the respective Pension 
Trustee as external auditor of the Royal Mail 
Pension Plan and the Royal Mail Defined 
Contribution Plan, the fees for which were 
£116,000 in 2016‑17. 

The Committee also has a policy that restricts 
the recruitment or secondment of individuals 
employed by the external auditor into positions 
that provide financial reporting oversight where 
they could exercise influence over the financial 
or regulatory statements of the Group or the 
level of audit and non audit fees. 

External auditor 
KPMG was appointed as external auditor in 
July 2015, following a competitive tender 
process during the 2014‑15 financial year. 
Under the current regulations, the Company 
will be required to tender no later than the 
2025‑26 financial year and the current audit 
partner will be required to rotate after the 
2020‑21 audit. 

The Committee has recommended the 
reappointment of KPMG as the Group’s 
external auditor to the Board for approval by 
shareholders at the AGM in July 2017. 

Risk management and internal control 
overview 
The Board collectively, including the 
Committee members, believes that effective 
risk management and a sound control 
environment are fundamental to the Group. 
The Code requires the Board to maintain 
sound risk management and internal control 
systems, to review their effectiveness at 
least annually and to report on this review 
to shareholders. A sound system of internal 
control depends on a thorough and regular 
evaluation of the nature and extent to which 
the Group is exposed to risk. 

The Group’s risk management and internal 
control system is designed to manage, rather 
than eliminate, risk as taking on manageable 
risk is an inherent part of undertaking 
the commercial activities of the Group. 
The system can only provide reasonable, 
not absolute, assurance against material 
misstatement or loss. 

There is an ongoing process for identifying, 
evaluating and managing the principal risks 
faced by the Group in accordance with the 
guidance detailed by the Code, including 
financial, operational and compliance risks, 
and risks to reputation. The process has 
been in place throughout the year and up 
to the date of approval of these financial 
statements. 

In addition, the Directors carry out a robust 
risk assessment of the Principal Risks 
facing the Group as set out on pages 37 
to 41. These include those principal risks 
that threaten the business model, future 
performance, solvency and liquidity of the 
Group. These reviews have been informed 
by the financial evaluation of severe but 
plausible scenarios of our principal risks 
which has also been used to support our 
Viability Statement on page 41. 

Internal control framework 
The Group has in place an internal control 
framework in relation to the Group’s 
financial reporting process and the Group’s 
process for preparing consolidated 
accounts. This framework includes an 
established organisational structure with 
clear lines of responsibilities, approval 
levels and delegated authorities; policies 
and procedures to ensure that adequate 
accounting records are maintained and 
transactions are recorded accurately; robust 
quarterly business unit performance reviews 
by the Chief Executive Officer and Chief 
Finance Officer; and a rigorous preparation 
process for the consolidated financial results 
including technical and disclosure reviews.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  61

Royal Mail plc 

|  Statement of corporate governance

Risk management framework 
The Group‑wide risk management 
framework includes risk governance, 
risk identification, measurement and 
management, and risk reporting and sets out 
the ‘top down’ and ‘bottom up’ approach to 
risk identification for the Group. 

During the year the business has: 

•  assessed its approach to risk 

management in line with the Code 
requirements, reviewed its Risk 
Management Policy and continued 
to strengthen the management and 
monitoring of risk within the Group 
including strengthening the Risk & Control 
Self Assessment (RCSA) process; and 

•  continued its emerging risk identification 

process through regular structured 
dialogue with subject matter experts 
across the business. 

The Group’s approach to risk management 
is based on the underlying principle of line 
management accountability for effective 
implementation of internal controls to 
manage risk as illustrated below. 

Speak Up Line 
Arrangements are in place to enable 
employees to raise concerns about potential 
wrongdoings in confidence and to ensure 
independent investigation of such matters. 
During the year, IA and RM reported to the 
Committee on the number of cases received 
and an analysis of the outcomes through 
the Employee Confidential Disclosure (EDC) 
Committee. 

Assessing the effectiveness of the system 
of risk management and internal control 
In addition to the specific constitution, 
meetings, reliance on experts, and focus 
areas highlighted above, the Committee uses 
a number of mechanisms to help it to arrive 
at its conclusions on the effectiveness of the 
system of risk management and internal 
control in the business. These include: 

1. Risk governance 
The Board has delegated responsibility for 
specific review of risk and control processes 
to the Committee and the Committee, 
in turn, is supported by the RMC, to help 
discharge its duties. The RMC meets to 
promote and support the establishment, 
communication and embedding of risk 
management throughout the Group. It also 
seeks to ensure that risks that are significant 
at Group level are being effectively managed. 
The RMC oversees and evaluates a ‘bottom 
up’ assessment of risks on a quarterly basis. 
It receives presentations from Business Units 

Royal Mail Governance and Three Lines of Defence 

Royal Mail plc Board 

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

e
c
n
e
f
e
D
f
o

s
e
n
L

i

Chief Executive’s Committee 

Audit and Risk Committee 

Risk Management 
Committee 

Senior Management 

First Line 

Second Line 

Third Line 

Operational and Business 
Management 

Internal Monitoring and 
Assurance Mechanisms 

Independent Assurance 

Primary business as usual 
controls over the risks to the 
business, located in the day to 
day operation. 

Internal monitoring and 
oversight of the fi rst line, 
through regular reviews, 
assessments and dedicated 
oversight functions. 

Independent evaluation over 
the adequacy and effectiveness 
of risk management, control 
and governance processes 
by IA and RM and other 
asssurance providers external 
to the business. 

RCSA1 – Monitoring and Reporting of Risks and Internal Controls 

1Risk & Control Self-Assessment 

Role of the Committee in assessing the principal risks 

Review of 
principal risk 
areas 

The Committee routinely assessed the risks that might impact the achievement 
of the Business Plan, including consideration of whether these should 
be categorised as a principal risk to the business (see Principal Risks on 
pages 37‑41). Committee discussions on risk also covered new and emerging 
risks and the interrelationships between the significant risks to the business. 

In particular, the Committee reviewed changes to the Group Risk Profile on 
a quarterly basis and held ‘deep dive’ discussions of principal risk areas with 
risk owners. 

The Committee holds the business to account for the management of risk and 
operation of control across the Group. 

During the year, deep dive risk discussions included: 

•  Cyber risks 

•  Competition 

Deep dive 
discussions 

•  Delivery of efficiency benefits versus maintenance of Quality of Service levels 

•  Employment legislation and regulation 

•  Growing in new areas 

•  Pensions 

on the operation of risk management and 
control processes on a cyclical basis. 

2. Assurance from Internal Audit 
IA and RM provide independent assurance 
to the Committee, Executive Management 
and the Board on the effectiveness of the 
internal control system and elements of the 
risk management process. This includes 
compliance with the Risk Management 
Mandatory Standards and validation of 
mitigation plans for Group level risks. IA and 
RM establish and agree with the Committee 

an annual plan of assignments and activities 
covering the whole Group, including GLS, 
based on discussions with the Board and 
Management. This also takes into account 
known issues in the business, areas of 
importance to the delivery of the business 
plan, areas subject to strong or emerging 
regulation or legislation or specific issues in 
the industry. During the year, the Committee 
evaluated the performance of IA and RM. 
It concluded that the function continued to 
be effective.

62 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
 
 
The IA work programme during 2016‑17 
included more than 30 risk based reviews in 
the UK and over 140 reviews in GLS covering 
both depots and head office. The programme 
was focused towards the key business 
priorities and included: 

•  business transformation and key 

programme reviews, including PDA 
service transformation, parcels 
programme activity and identity 
based products; 

•  major business process reviews including 
data loss prevention, payroll, aviation 
security, operational compliance and 
IT disaster recovery; 

•  continued rolling programme of review 
of the basic business controls and 
independent validations related to the 
management of Group level risks; and 

•  conformance of key units/functions to 
defined Risk Management Mandatory 
Standards. 

3. External audit activity 
External audits and reviews take place 
during the year to provide Management, the 
Board and Ofcom with assurance on specific 
matters. Activity includes: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

the external auditor performs a statutory 
year end audit; 

the external auditor performs an audit 
of the regulatory accounts as part of 
Universal Service Provider accounting 
requirements; 

the externally measured end to end 
Quality of Service is audited by an 
independent accounting firm (appointed by 
Ofcom) as part of Royal Mail’s Designated 
Universal Service Provider condition 
requirements; and 

the Universal Service Obligation daily 
collections and deliveries performance 
reporting and methodology is assured by 
an independent accounting firm (appointed 
by Royal Mail) as part of Royal Mail’s 
designated Universal Service. 

In the carrying out of these activities, 
the Board considers it has fulfilled its 
obligations under the Code in respect of risk 
management and internal controls. Further 
details of the Principal Risks and how they 
are managed and mitigated can be found on 
pages 37‑41. 

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Nomination Committee 
report 

Dear Shareholder, 
The role of the Nomination Committee is to 
review the composition of the Board and plan 
for its refreshment as applicable with regard 
to composition, balance and structure. 

As well as succession planning and the 
continued evaluation of the balance of skills, 
knowledge and experience of the Board, the 
Committee continues to focus on diversity, 
reviewing leadership attributes and approving 
changes to senior management. 

See page 56 for further information on 

diversity. 

There were a number of changes to our Board 
composition during the year. We were pleased 
to appoint Rita Griffin in December 2016 as 
a Non‑Executive Director and a member of 
the Audit and Risk Committee. The Board 
employed the executive search firm, Egon 
Zehnder, to assist with Rita’s appointment. 
The Nomination Committee considered 
candidates against objective criteria, having 
due regard for the benefits of Board diversity, 
and, following interviews with other Directors, 
recommended to the Board that they appoint 
Rita as a Director of the Company. The 
Company also employs Egon Zehnder for 
both senior executive appointments and some 
executive development. Our Non‑Executive 
Director Nick Horler retired in February 
2017, having served on the Board for nearly 
seven years. We have also announced further 
changes with the stepping down of our 
Chief Finance Officer Matthew Lester at the 
conclusion of this year’s AGM. 

The Chief Executive led the search and 
proposed candidates to the Nomination 
Committee based on the skill, knowledge and 
experience required for the role. On 15 May 
2017, we announced that Stuart Simpson, 
Director of Group Finance, will be appointed 
CFO and join the Royal Mail Board at the 

conclusion of the AGM on 20 July 2017. 
Stuart's appointment follows a comprehensive 
search that included both internal and external 
candidates. 

Alongside myself, the Committee members 
are Cath Keers, Orna Ni‑Chionna and 
Paul Murray, who was appointed to the 
Committee on 16 November 2016. Meetings 
of the Committee were also attended by the 
Company Secretary and, where relevant, the 
Group HR Director. The Chief Executive Officer 
and other Non‑Executive Directors may 
also be requested to attend when required. 
The number of Committee meetings held 
during 2016‑17 and Committee members’ 
attendance is set out on page 51. 

The following report outlines the Committee’s 
membership and attendance, its role, its 
focus during the year, Directors’ re‑election 
and diversity. 

Nomination Committee Terms of Reference 
The full Terms of Reference for the 
Committee can be found on our website 
www.royalmailgroup.com/aboutus/ 
management‑and‑committees/ 
nomination committee 

Role of the Committee 
A summary of the responsibilities of the 
Committee in connection with appointments 
to the Board and senior management is 
shown below: 

• 

• 

• 

to regularly review the structure, size 
and composition of the Board and to 
evaluate the balance of skills, knowledge, 
experience and diversity of the Board 
to inform the capabilities required for a 
particular appointment; 

to give full consideration to succession 
planning for Chairman, Directors, Chief 
Executive Officer and senior management; 

to identify, and nominate for approval 
by the Board, candidates to fill Board 
vacancies as and when they arise; 

• 

in identifying suitable Board Candidates 
the Committee shall: 

–  use open advertising or the services 
of external advisers to facilitate the 
search; 

–  consider candidates from a wide range 

of backgrounds; and 

–  consider candidates on merit and 

against objective criteria and with due 
regard to the benefits of diversity for 
the Board, including gender, taking 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  63

Royal Mail plc 

|  Statement of corporate governance

Key areas of focus during the year 
Matters the Committee considered during the 
year include: 

•  assessing the composition of the 

Board and its Committees in view of 
the appointment of Rita Griffin as a 
Non‑Executive Director, the retirement 
of Nick Horler as a Non‑Executive 
Director, the forthcoming departure 
of Matthew Lester as Chief Finance 
Officer and the appointment of Paul 
Murray, a Non‑Executive Director to this 
Committee; 

•  succession planning and executive talent 

review and management; 

• 

• 

the annual evaluation of the Committee’s 
performance; and 

the annual review of the Committee’s 
Terms of Reference. 

Key areas of focus for next year 
During 2017‑18, the Committee will continue 
to focus on the succession plans for both 
the Board and senior management with a 
keen focus on the diversity framework and 
ensuring the skills and experience within the 
Group help it deliver its strategic framework. 

Nomination Committee effectiveness 
An internal evaluation of the Committee was 
carried out in 2016‑17 and is discussed in 
greater detail on page 57. 

Directors’ re‑election 
The Committee has considered the 
performance of each individual Director: 
whether he or she continues to be 
effective and can continue to demonstrate 
commitment to the role. Biographical details 
of each of the Directors, together with details 
of their skills and experience, may be found 
on pages 49‑51. Following a performance 
evaluation of each Director and the Board as 
a whole, all Directors are considered by the 
Board to be fully effective. This supports the 
proposal for their re‑election at the AGM. 

Peter Long 
Chairman 
17 May 2017 

• 

• 

care that appointees have enough time 
available to devote to the position; 

to ensure that, on appointment to the 
Board, Non‑Executive Directors receive a 
formal letter of appointment setting out 
clearly what is expected of them in terms 
of time commitment, committee service 
and involvement outside meetings; 

for the appointment of a Chairman, to 
prepare a job description including the 
time commitment expected. A proposed 
Chairman’s other significant commitments 
should be disclosed to the Board before 
appointment. Any changes to the 
Chairman’s commitments should be 
reported to the Board as they arise; 

• 

to review annually the time required 
from Non‑Executive Directors to fulfil 
their duties; 

• 

to make recommendations to the 
Board concerning: 

–  succession planning for Executive 
and Non‑Executive Directors and, 
in particular, for the key roles of 
Chairman and Chief Executive Officer; 

–  nominations for the role of SID; 

–  membership of the Board Committees 
in consultation with the Chairs of 
those committees; 

–  the re‑appointment of any 

Non‑Executive Director at the 
conclusion of their specified term of 
office having given due regard to their 
performance and ability to continue to 
contribute to the Board; 

–  the re‑election of Directors by 

shareholders under the re election 
provisions of the Code or the 
retirement by rotation provisions in the 
Company’s Articles of Association (the 
Articles), having due regard to their 
performance and ability to continue to 
contribute to the Board and the need 
for progressive refreshing of the Board; 

–  nominations for the appointment of 
Director positions on the Boards of 
subsidiary/joint venture Boards/main 
Business Unit Executive Committee; 
and 

–  nominations for the appointment of 
trustees of the Company’s pension 
schemes and trustees of the Postal 
Heritage Trust. 

64 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Pensions Committee report 

Dear Shareholder, 
Recognising the significance of the Group’s 
pension schemes to its financial management 
and affairs, and to its employees, the Board 
has appointed a standing committee to 
provide additional oversight and review of 
pension matters. 

Role of the Committee 
The Committee reports and makes 
recommendations to the Board (and to 
Royal Mail Group Limited as principal 
employer of the Group’s pension schemes), 
and, where appropriate, to the Risk and Audit 
Committee, on: 

•  pension matters which are of strategic 

importance to the Group; 

•  pension matters involving a financial 

impact of over £100 million; 

•  material changes to benefits that require 
rule changes or changes to the pension 
schemes’ Trust Deeds; and 

• 

the actuarial assumptions to be used in 
calculating the accounting charge and 
pension disclosures in the Company’s 
Financial Results. 

In particular, the Committee: 

•  reviews advice and information provided 
by the Group’s external pension advisers; 

•  reviews and provides input on the 

assumptions to be used by the Trustees 
relating to funding valuations, and 
provides the Group’s opinion and 
feedback on the Trustees’ Statement of 
Investment Principles; 

•  reviews major policy, regulatory, 
legislative, accounting, reporting, 
industrial relations and Governmental 

issues impacting the pension schemes 
and makes decisions, recommendations 
and reports to the Board accordingly; 

•  reviews reports from the Trustee 

Executive on the schemes’ financial 
position, investment performance, 
administration levels and other activities; 
and 

•  approves the appointment, 

re‑appointment, period of appointment, 
removal, and remuneration of the Chair 
of Trustees. 

The full Terms of Reference for the 
Committee can be found at www. 
royalmailgroup.com/about‑us/management‑ 
and‑committees/pensions‑committee 

Membership 
In addition to myself, the members of the 
Committee are Paul Murray and Matthew 
Lester. The meetings of the Committee 
have also been attended by the Group HR 
Director, the Chief of Staff, the Company 
Secretary, Legal Director, Pensions and 
Employee Benefits, the Director of Corporate 
Finance, the Head of Pensions Strategy, 
and representatives from the Company’s 
pensions’ advisers, Willis Towers Watson 
Limited. The number of Committee meetings 
held during 2016‑17 and Committee 
members’ attendance is set out on page 51. 

Key areas of focus during the year 
For some time, Royal Mail has been 
reviewing the future of its pension plans 
as part of the 2018 Pension Review. 
Recognising the affordability challenge 
of the Group’s current arrangements, 
Royal Mail consulted during 2016‑17 with 
approximately 90,000 members of the 
Royal Mail Pension Plan (RMPP). Royal Mail 
confirmed that it is committed to continue 
to provide sustainable, good quality pension 
benefits. The Committee engaged with 
Management throughout the year regarding 
the 2018 Pension Review, and provided input 
on Management’s thinking and proposals in 
advance of discussions with stakeholders. 
Further information on the 2018 Pension 
Review can be found on page 110. 

In addition, the Committee reviewed: 

• 

• 

the likely results of the April 2015 
Valuation and Scheme funding review and 
the implications for future affordability 
and benefit design; 

investment strategy and risk 
management, investment performance, 
fees and costs and scheme 
administration; 

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

• 

• 

the impact of pension legislation changes, 
pensions accounting and treatment of 
scheme surplus and current developments 
in corporate pensions; 

the actuarial assumptions used in 
calculating the accounting charge and 
pension disclosures in the Company’s 
interim and full year Financial Results; and 

• 

the annual evaluation of the Committee’s 
effectiveness and its Terms of Reference. 

Key areas of focus for next year 
In addition to the ongoing matters under its 
Terms of Reference, the Committee expects 
to be giving particular consideration during 
the year ahead to: 

• 

• 

the conclusion of 2018 Pension 
Review and the proposals for future 
pension benefits prior to these being 
recommended to the Board for approval; 

the implementation of the outcomes 
of the Review and communication to 
members; and 

• 

the results and implications of the RMPP’s 
2015 valuation. 

Pension Committee effectiveness 
An internal evaluation of the Committee was 
carried out in 2016‑17. The Committee was 
judged to be fully effective in carrying out its 
responsibilities. The results are set out in 
greater detail on page 57. 

Les Owen 
Chair of the Pensions Committee 
17 May 2017 

Other Committees 
TopCo Committee 
TopCo Committee provides overall support 
for the Chief Executive in discharging the 
responsibility for managing the business and 
accountability to the Board. The Committee 
also oversees performance management 
and outlook for the business, achievement 
of KPIs and the Corporate Balanced 
Scorecard, the Company’s compliance with 
the Market Abuse Regulations and any other 
significant business issues. The Committee 
meets monthly and is chaired by the Chief 
Executive Officer. 

See pages 52‑53 for Committee 

members' biographies. 

Chief Executive’s Committee 
The Chief Executive’s Committee supports the 
Chief Executive Officer on matters concerning 
the Group’s overall framework, including 
risk management, financial and operating 
performance, annual and strategic plans, 
external stakeholders, industrial relations 
and health and safety policy. The Committee 
also develops and monitors deployment of 
the Group’s strategy, annual operating plans 
and budgets for plc Board approval. The 
Committee meets monthly and is chaired by 
the Chief Executive Officer. 

See pages 52‑53 for Committee 

members' biographies. 

Risk Management Committee 
The Risk Management Committee is a 
Management Committee of the Chief 
Executive’s Committee with a reporting line 
to – and which supports – the Audit and Risk 
Committee. It meets to promote and support 
the establishment, communication and 
embedding of risk management throughout 
the business. The Committee meets quarterly 
and is chaired by the Chief Executive Officer.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  65

Royal Mail plc 

|  Directors’ remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration report 

Dear Shareholder 

On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present our Remuneration 
Report for 2016-17. I was delighted to receive your support for 
our new Directors’ Remuneration Policy at the AGM in July last 
year, endorsing our proposals to align our executive reward 
principles and practice more closely to the successful 
transformation of our business, and this report covers our first 
year of implementation of this policy. 

Performance in 2016-17 
As discussed elsewhere in this Annual 
Report, during 2016-17 the Company 
continued to make progress on our 
transformation programme. We delivered a 
great service at Christmas, even better than 
last year, with 138 million parcels handled in 
December alone. 

We have continued to transform the 
organisation in order to manage the decline in 
letter volumes whilst becoming increasingly 
competitive in the parcels business. 
We are seeing the impact of overall business 
uncertainty in the UK on letter volumes, in 
particular advertising and business letters. 
Against this backdrop, we managed our cost 
base efficiently. Highlights included: 

•  An adjusted operating profit, before 

transformation costs, of £701 million, at 
the budgeted foreign exchange rate; 

•  The third consecutive year of achieving our 

UKPIL cost reduction target; 

•  A productivity improvement in collections, 

processing and delivery of 2.7 per 
cent, towards the higher end of our 
2.0 – 3.0 per cent target range; and 

•  A significant reduction in the number of 

road traffic collisions, improving the safety 
of our colleagues and our communities. 

The performance achieved resulted in 
payouts to our executive team on both 
our Annual Bonus and our Long Term 
Incentive Plan (LTIP), in accordance with 
our remuneration policy. This is explained in 
more detail below. 

Board changes 
As mentioned elsewhere, our Chief Finance 
Officer (CFO), Matthew Lester has decided 
to leave the business this July, after nearly 
seven years of service with the Company. 
Other than for the 2014 award vesting this 
year, his outstanding LTIP awards will lapse 
in accordance with the plan rules, and he 
will not be eligible for the award of deferred 
shares that is determined from the 2016-17 
bonus outturn. He will also not receive any 
payment for loss of office. The Committee 
determined that he would be eligible for 
the cash element of the 2016-17 Annual 
Bonus given that he was employed for the 
full financial year; and the Committee also 
agreed that his 2014 LTIP award, subject to 
the achievement of performance conditions, 
would be capable of vesting given that he was 
employed by the Company for the whole of 
the performance period. The Committee took 
the view that this was justifiable on account 
of his dedicated service to the Company 
throughout his notice period. It has been to 
the Company’s advantage that he gave us 
more than his contractual notice in order for 
us to plan succession. 

I am delighted that Stuart Simpson will 
be joining the Board as our new Chief 
Finance Officer. On appointment, Stuart’s 
remuneration package will be in accordance 
with the Remuneration Policy, including 
a reduced level of pension allowance as 
shown below: 

£450,000 
Base Salary
Maximum Annual Cash Bonus
100% of salary 
Maximum Deferred Share Bonus  100% of salary 
100% of salary 
Maximum LTIP
17.5% of salary 
Pension Allowance

Remuneration outcomes in 
2016-17 
Annual bonus 
Our performance in 2016-17 resulted in the 
achievement of a good outturn against our 
Corporate Balanced Scorecard. This scorecard 
accounts for 80 per cent of the potential 
Annual Bonus for Executive Directors. A 
series of strategic objectives, which were set 
by the Committee, represented the remaining 
20 per cent of the potential bonus, against 
which there was also strong performance. 

This resulted in a cash bonus of 80 per cent 
of salary for both our Chief Executive Officer 
(CEO), Moya Greene, and for Matthew Lester. 
In accordance with the new Policy, this same 
amount will be awarded in shares to our CEO 
under the Deferred Share Bonus Plan (DSBP), 
to be granted in June and deferred for three 
years. More detail about the annual bonus 
and our performance is given on pages 77-79. 

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) 
The 2014 LTIP is due to vest in July 
2017, once the outcome under the Total 
Shareholder Return (TSR) metric (which has 
a performance period that runs from the 
July 2014 grant date for three calendar years) 
is known. Using the latest available data for 
the TSR metric, the plan is likely to vest in 
July 2017 between 46 per cent and 53.5 per 
cent of maximum. More details of the LTIP 
performance can be found on pages 79 to 80. 

Pension provision 

Following the shareholder consultation we 
undertook last year, the Committee decided 
to reduce the pension allowance paid to 
any newly appointed Executive Director 

66 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

to 17.5 per cent of salary. The existing 
arrangements for current Executive Directors 
will remain the same. 

The impact of the new 
Remuneration Policy on 
delivering our strategic aims 
This year was the first in which shares were 
granted in accordance with the new LTIP 
rules and will be granted in respect of our 
DSBP, following the approval of the new 
Policy at last year’s AGM. 

As outlined in last year’s report, the new LTIP 
is now more focused, based solely on TSR 
which the Committee determined as the most 
effective way of measuring the successful 
implementation of our business strategy. 
We are mindful of the need to ensure that 

having a single performance measure does 
not lead to an inappropriate vesting outcome. 
We are committed to completing a thorough 
review of underlying business performance 
at the end of each three year performance 
period to ensure that our TSR result is 
reflective of Company performance over 
that time. 

The CEO will receive the first grant of shares 
under the new DSBP in June following a 
successful year. Under our shareholding 
guidelines, Executive Directors are expected 
to keep any shares already owned and any 
shares released under the LTIP and the 
DSBP (except for those sold to cover any 
tax and social security obligations) until the 
shareholding guideline of 200 per cent of 
base salary has been met. 

We continue to aim to maintain an open 
dialogue with our shareholders on director 
pay arrangements. We believe that our 
policies and their implementation are true 
to the spirit as well as the letter of what 
the various regulations and Codes seek 
to achieve. And we continue to pay close 
attention to the discussion of this subject so 
that we can reflect the best thinking in our 
own context. Together with the rest of the 
Board, I look forward to hearing your views 
on our remuneration arrangements and will 
be available to answer any questions you 
may have at the AGM. 

Orna Ni-Chionna 
Chair, Remuneration Committee 
17 May 2017 

Our current Remuneration Policy 
What is our current Remuneration Policy for Executive Directors? 
Our current Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at our AGM on 21 July 2016. 

The improvements we made are intended to reward delivery at pace of the objectives required to achieve sustainable success, while maintaining 
appropriate flexibility in target setting from year to year. In summary, the objectives for our new policy are to: 

•  be more aligned with our fast-changing market place and with what our executives need to focus on year on year 

• 

• 

incentivise sustained year on year improvements with the aim of delivering long-term value for shareholders 

increase the proportion of remuneration which is delivered in the form of deferred equity, from around 25 per cent to 40 per cent of the total, 
and encourage long term shareholding supported by an increase in the shareholding requirement for our Executive Directors. 

Under our new policy, a larger proportion of the overall package is linked to performance, more is delivered in shares and the potential payout is 
over a longer timeline. 

Remuneration Principles 

Remuneration Principles 

Overall package

The overall remuneration package should take account of the dynamics of the market in which we operate. 
Our incentive targets need to be flexible enough to ensure that we can reward performance appropriately. 

Incentive levels and structure

Incentive payouts should be based primarily on the achievement of relevant operational, financial and strategic 
goals, as well as the creation of long-term shareholder value. 

Alignment with shareholders

Management interests should be aligned to the interests of shareholders, including through building a 
significant Royal Mail shareholding.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  67

Royal Mail plc 

|  Directors’ remuneration report

Policy table 
The following tables summarise the key elements of our remuneration, its purpose and link to strategy and the maximum opportunity. The policy 
is not subject to a shareholder vote this year. The full policy can be found at http://www.royalmailgroup.com/about-us/management-and-
committees/remuneration-committee. 

Fixed remuneration 

At a Glance

Base Salary 

Operation 

Purpose & Link To Strategy 
Reflects the scope and responsibility of the role, whilst taking account of the skills and experience of the individual. 

Used to attract and retain talented executives to deliver the business strategy. 

CEO: £547,800 (effective 1 January 2015) 

CFO: £475,000 (effective 1 April 2016) 

Salary levels for the Executive Directors are normally reviewed annually. The Committee takes into account 
factors such as the performance of the Company, the performance of the Executive Director, any changes in role 
and responsibility, assessment against relevant comparator groups, internal relativities and the level of increase 
being offered to our frontline employees. 

Increases will normally be in line with the broader employee population. Increases may be made above this level 
to take account of changing circumstances such as a change in responsibility, progression in the role, individual 
performance or a significant increase in the scale or size of the role. 

Benefits 

Purpose & Link To Strategy 
To support the attraction and retention of talented executives by providing a competitive offering. 

The value of the benefits stated is the maximum cost to 
the Company of providing them 

Benefits currently include the provision of a company car and health insurance, or the cash equivalent of these 
benefits. Life assurance and health screening are also provided. Additional benefits may be offered such as 
relocation allowances on recruitment. 

Moya Greene is contractually entitled to financial advice, use of a driver for business-related travel and two return 
flights to Canada each year. 

Executive Directors are entitled to participate in the SAYE scheme, with monthly deductions being taken for a 
period of three or five years. The savings can be used to purchase shares at a discounted price set at the start of 
each plan. 

Pension Allowance 

Purpose & Link To Strategy 
To provide a competitive post-retirement income. 

CEO: £200,000 per annum cash allowance 

Company contribution to a defined contribution pension scheme and/or a cash supplement (in lieu of pension). 

CFO: 40 per cent of salary cash allowance 

For newly appointed Executive Directors, the pension 
allowance is 17.5 per cent of salary 

The Committee maintains historical rates of pension allowance for existing Executive Directors, in line with their 
contracts; however it has adopted a lower per cent pension allowance for newly appointed Executive Directors.

68 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Variable remuneration 

At a Glance – maximum opportunity

Operation

Performance measures 

Annual bonus 

Purpose & Link To Strategy 
Designed to reward achievement of key strategic, financial and operational priorities for the year, to deliver strong performance in service of longer term strategic 
goals and creation of long-term shareholder value. Part of the total annual incentive opportunity is a deferred share award encouraging a long-term view, 
providing alignment with shareholders’ interests. 

Maximum total annual incentive opportunity of 200 per cent 
of salary, split equally between two plans, an annual cash 
bonus award and a deferred share bonus award. Two thirds 
earned for target performance. 

The total annual incentive opportunity is provided as 
follows: 

Aligned to the Corporate Balanced Scorecard for the 
Executive Directors each year. 

•  one half is payable in cash, paid at the end of the 

annual performance period 

•  one half is granted as a deferred share award, after 
the end of the performance period and subject 
to continued employment over the three year 
vesting period. 

Deferred share awards will be granted to Executive 
Directors in the form of a conditional share award. 
The Committee will normally award dividend 
equivalents on deferred shares to plan participants to 
the extent that they vest. 

Malus provisions will apply to the deferred share 
award over the three year vesting period. A clawback 
mechanism will apply to the cash bonus for a period 
of three years following the bonus determination. 

Annual performance measures and weightings will 
be selected at the start of each financial year to align 
with the key strategic, financial and operational 
priorities of the business. 

The measures themselves may change on an annual 
basis as financial and operational priorities of the 
business change. 

For 2017, 80 per cent of the Annual Bonus will be 
based on the scorecard targets, and 20 per cent 
will be based on the achievement against strategic 
objectives. 

A minimum of 50 per cent of the scorecard targets 
shall be financial, with the remainder including robust 
operational, customer and people KPIs. 

A minimum level of operating profit must be achieved 
before any bonus is payable to an Executive Director. 

The Committee may use its discretion to: 

•  change the performance measures and targets and the weighting attached to the performance measures and targets part-way through a performance year if there is a 

significant and material event which causes the Committee to believe that the original measures, weightings and targets are no longer appropriate; 

•  to make downward or upward movements to the amount of bonus earned resulting from the application of the performance measures, if the Committee believe that the 

bonus outcomes are not a fair and accurate reflection of business performance. 

Long Term Incentive Plan 

Purpose & Link To Strategy 
Supports executive recruitment and retention, with an appropriate balance between short-term performance and the creation of long-term, sustainable 
shareholder value. 

Maximum award level of 100 per cent of salary.

Awards are granted annually to Executive Directors in 
the form of a conditional share award. 

These will vest at the end of a three year period 
subject to: 

•  the Executive Director’s continued employment at 

the date of vesting; and 

•  the satisfaction of the performance conditions. 

The Committee will normally award dividend 
equivalents on those shares to the extent that 
they vest. 

Following the vesting, there is a holding period of 
two years when Executive Directors cannot sell the 
vested shares other than to pay tax. 

Malus provisions apply over the performance period. 
Clawback will apply over the holding period. 

Performance measures and/or weightings reflect 
the business strategy at the time, and are measured 
over three years. The Committee may change the 
balance of the measures, or use different measures 
for subsequent awards, as appropriate. 

For the 2017 award, 100 per cent of the award will be 
dependent on TSR against the FTSE 100 (excluding 
mining and financial companies). If the Group’s 
relative TSR performance is ranked at median, 
50 per cent of the award will vest, increasing to full 
vesting if performance is in the top quartile of the 
group. The underlying performance of the business 
will also be taken into account when determining the 
vesting. 

In exceptional circumstances the Committee retains the discretion to: 

•  vary or waive the performance conditions applying to LTIP awards if the Board considers it appropriate and the new performance conditions are deemed reasonable and 

are not materially more or less difficult to satisfy than the original conditions.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  69

Royal Mail plc 

|  Directors’ remuneration report

Shareholding guideline 

At a Glance

Operation 

Purpose & Link To Strategy 
To ensure alignment between remuneration and long-term shareholder value creation. 

Shareholding guideline of 200 per cent of salary

Directors are expected to keep any shares they already own and any shares released under the LTIP and the 
DSBP (except for those sold to cover any tax and social security obligations) until this is achieved. 

The periods over which malus and clawback operate under our Policy 

Start of Performance Period

+1 Years

+2 Years

+3 Years 

+4 Years

+5 Years

Annual Cash Bonus 

Performance period, 
subject to malus 

Subject to clawback 

Cash award paid 

Deferred Share 
Award 

Pre-grant performance 
period, subject to malus 

Vesting Period, subject to malus 

Long Term 
Incentive Award 

Performance period, subject to malus terms 

Holding period, subject to clawback

Deferred shares 
released 

Award vests subject 
to performance 

Post-tax shares 
released 

What is the remuneration policy for the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors? 

Chairman and Non-Executive Directors Policy 

Purpose & Link To Strategy 
Provides a level of fees to support recruitment and retention of Non-Executive Directors and a Chairman with the necessary experience to fulfil the leadership role 
required of them. 

Operation 
The Board is responsible for setting the remuneration of the Non-Executive Directors. The Remuneration Committee is responsible for setting the Chairman’s fees. 

Non-Executive Directors are paid an annual fee and additional fees for chairmanship of committees. The Chairman does not receive any additional fees for membership 
of committees. 

The fees for Non-Executive Directors and the Chairman are set at broadly the median of the comparator group. Fees are reviewed annually based on equivalent roles in the 
comparator group used to review salaries paid to the Executive Directors. In general, the level of fee increase for the Non-Executive Directors and the Chairman will be set 
taking account of any change in responsibility and will take into account the general rise in salaries across the UK workforce. 

The Company will pay reasonable expenses incurred by the Non-Executive Directors and Chairman and may settle any tax incurred in relation to these. 

Non-Executive Directors and the Chairman do not participate in any variable remuneration or benefits arrangements.

70 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

How do the KPIs for the annual bonus and LTIP link to the Group strategy? 
Annual bonus 
80 per cent of the performance in the Annual Bonus is measured through the Corporate Balanced Scorecard. This Scorecard tracks a range of 
short-term measures that are critical to the creation of long-term, sustainable shareholder value and the delivery of our strategy. There are no 
changes to the metrics for 2017-18, which continue to focus on our people, customer, efficiency and financial performance. The scorecard is 
shown below: 

First Class quality of service
Composite parcels quality

Mean business customer
satisfaction
Total customer
complaints

3%

40%

g great cu st o m

Total 
Customer 
Complaints (’000) 

Mean Business 
Customer 
Satisfaction 

rin
e
v
i
l
e
D

•

s

r

e

r

e

s e r v i c e through engag

1st Class 
Retail Quality 
of Service 

Employee 
Engagement 

e
d, 

s

a

f

e

&

Road Traffic 
Collisions 
(av. no. vehicles) 
(’000) 

Productivity for 
Delivery, Collections 
& Processing (%) 

p

r

o

d

u

c

t

i

v
e

p
e
o
p
l
e
, a

d

l

o

h

In-Year Trading 
Cashflow (£m) 

e

r

a

h

s

Group 
Operating 
Profit excl 
transformation 
costs (£m) 

Total Group 
Revenue (£m) 

le business results for all 

a

b

Total UKPIL 
Costs (£m) 

chieving sustain

20 per cent of performance in the plan will be assessed against a series of strategic objectives. The following objectives have been agreed 
between the Chairman and the CEO. They will be used in conjunction with the Corporate Scorecard to measure the performance of the Executive 
Directors at the end of the financial year: 

1.  Apply sufficient resource focused on global parcels to enable acceleration of our rate of expansion (primarily via acquisition). 

2.  Continue to drive profitable growth in GLS, our parcels business in Europe. 

3.  Deliver the next stage of the parcels strategy in the UK, including enhancement of the customer proposition at acceptable cost through 

technology deployment. 

4. 

Implement the steps necessary to defend the sustainability of the core UK business in the face of continuing and substantial declines in 
letter volumes and revenues. 

LTIP 
Our LTIP has a single metric directly reflecting shareholder value achieved, including dividends, relative to other large quoted companies. 
The Committee believes relative TSR is an appropriate measure of strategy implementation over a three year period. It rewards the creation 
of value for shareholders through the successful execution of our strategy. TSR also reflects the importance of dividend yield to the Group’s 
shareholders and the Company’s commitment to a progressive dividend policy. In the event that the underlying financial performance of the 
Group is not reflected in the TSR performance, the Committee would retain discretion to adjust the award.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  71

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Royal Mail plc 

|  Directors’ remuneration report

What is the remuneration opportunity under the policy? 
The following charts set out the remuneration scenarios under the policy for the Executive Directors and the actual level of the single figure for 
the year being reported on. We have included the single figure so that you can see where against our policy scenarios the actual remuneration for 
the year sits. 

CEO (£000s) 

Fixed Remuneration

Variable Remuneration 

Maximum 

31% 

23% 

23% 

23%

£2,434 

On Target 

42% 

20%

20%

18% 

£1,850 

Minimum 

100% 

£791 

Actual 
2016-17 

42% 

23% 

23% 

12% 

£1,880 

0

250

500

750

1000

1250

1500

1750

2000

2250

2500 

Fixed Remuneration

Annual Bonus

Deferred Share Award

LTIP 

CFO (£000s) 

Fixed Remuneration

Variable Remuneration 

Maximum 

31% 

23% 

23% 

23%

£2,105 

On Target 

42% 

20%

20%

18% 

£1,599 

Minimum 

100% 

£680 

Actual 
2016-17 

54% 

31% 

15% 

£1,252 

0

250

500

750

1000

1250

1500

1750

2000

2250

2500 

Fixed Remuneration

Annual Bonus

Deferred Share Award

LTIP 

Assumptions 
Minimum/fixed remuneration: This includes salary (CEO: £547,800, CFO: £475,000), pension allowance (CEO: £200,000, CFO: 40 per cent of salary) and benefits (CEO: £43,000, 
CFO: £15,000). 
On target: 
Bonus: For the cash bonus, on target is two-thirds of maximum and the same value is used for the deferred share award. 
LTIP: The expected value is taken as 60 per cent of maximum. 
Maximum: 
Bonus: For the cash bonus, this is 100 per cent of salary and the same value is used for the deferred share award. 
LTIP: For the LTIP this is 100 per cent of salary. 
No assumptions have been made in relation to future share price movements or dividend reinvestments.

72 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

How will the Policy be implemented in 2017-18? 
The following table sets out how the Committee proposes to operate the Policy next year. 

Element

Base salary

Benefits

Implementation of policy in 2017-18 

We annually review the salary of the CEO and CFO and will do the same in 2017-18. Any increases in salary will be no greater 
than the general increase provided to employees. 

No change to benefit provision for 2017-18 

Pension Allowance

No change to pension allowance provision for 2017-18 

Annual Bonus

The maximum total annual incentive opportunity for the Executive Directors will remain at 200 per cent of salary, as per agreed 
policy, half delivered in cash and half in deferred shares. 

For the 2017-18 annual bonus, 80 per cent of the award will be based on achievement against the scorecard, in which at least 
50 per cent of the measures will be financial, with the remainder focused on operational, customer and people-related targets. 
20 per cent of the award will be based on achievement against strategic objectives. 

The Committee is of the opinion that given the commercial sensitivity arising in relation to the detailed financial targets 
used for the Annual Bonus, the disclosure of precise targets for the Annual Bonus in advance would not be in shareholders’ 
interests. Actual targets, performance achieved and awards made will be published at the end of the performance periods so 
shareholders can fully assess the basis for any payouts under the Plan. 

LTIP

The Executive Directors will be eligible for an award equivalent to 100 per cent of salary. 

100 per cent of the award will be based on the Group’s relative TSR performance against the FTSE 100 (excluding mining and 
financial companies). 

The vesting schedule will measure the Group’s performance over three years as follows: 

•  50 per cent of salary will vest if TSR performance is equal to the median TSR of the companies in the comparator group 

•  Maximum vesting will occur if TSR is equal to, or greater than, the upper quartile TSR of the comparator group 

The award is subject to straight line vesting between these two points. 

In the event that the underlying financial performance of the Group is not reflected in the TSR performance, the Committee 
would retain discretion to adjust the award. 

Shareholding guidelines

200 per cent of salary for Executive Directors. 

What would the remuneration arrangements be for a new Executive Director? 
Salaries for new Executive Directors appointed to the Board will be set in accordance with the terms of the approved Remuneration Policy in 
force at the time of appointment. In particular, they will take account of the appointee’s skills and experience as well as the scope and market 
rate for the role. 

Benefits consistent with those offered to other Executive Directors under the approved Remuneration Policy in force at the time of appointment 
will be offered, including the discretion to offer additional benefits such as relocation allowance on recruitment. Following the shareholder 
consultation we undertook last year, the pension allowance paid to any newly appointed Executive Director will be 17.5 per cent of salary. 
All existing arrangements will remain the same. 

Incentive arrangements for new Executive Directors will be in accordance with the approved Remuneration Policy in force at the time of 
appointment. This means the maximum total annual incentive opportunity award in any year would be 200 per cent of salary, split equally 
between cash and deferred shares, and the maximum LTIP award would be 100 per cent of salary, (with the ability to offer up to 200 per cent of 
salary for the year of recruitment). 

For an externally appointed Executive Director, the Company may offer additional cash or share-based payments that it considers necessary 
to buy out current entitlements from the former employer that will be forfeited on recruitment. Any such arrangements would reflect the type 
of award (for example, cash or shares); time horizons; and levels of conditionality of the remuneration foregone. In order to facilitate buy-out 
arrangements, existing incentive schemes will be used to the extent possible, and the Committee will retain discretion on the application of 
holding periods, performance conditions and performance periods. 

For an internally appointed Executive Director, any outstanding variable pay element, such as a long-term incentive plan awarded in respect of 
the prior role will continue on its original terms. 

The fees for Non-Executive Directors appointed will be set in accordance with the terms of the approved remuneration policy in force at the time 
of appointment. 

The Committee always seeks to ensure that any remuneration package is set such that the Company is able to attract the right calibre of 
individual required, whilst taking account of affordability, and therefore the Committee must be allowed to exercise its judgement.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  73

Royal Mail plc 

|  Directors’ remuneration report

What are the Executive Directors’ terms of employment? 
The Executive Directors are employed under service contracts. The dates of these contracts are: 

Moya Greene

Matthew Lester

Date of Contract

Notice Period from RMG (months) 

15 July 2010

24 November 2010

12 

12 

The contracts have an indefinite term that may be terminated by the Executive Directors with six months’ written notice. The Company 
can terminate contracts with twelve months’ notice. Copies of the Executive Directors’ service contracts are available for inspection at the 
Company’s AGM. 

What are the terms of appointment for the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors? 
The Non-Executive Directors (including the Chairman) are appointed by rolling letters of appointment. The Non-Executive Directors are appointed 
for up to three years, subject to annual review and re-election. One month’s notice is required by either party (four months’ notice in the case of 
the Chairman). The dates of the Chairman’s and Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment are set out in the following table. 

Peter Long

Rita Griffin

Nick Horler

Cath Keers

Paul Murray

Orna Ni-Chionna

Les Owen

Date of Contract 

Unexpired Term at 26 March 2017 
(months) 

18 June 2015

1 December 2016

20 September 2016

20 September 2016

20 September 2016

20 September 2016

20 September 2016

14 

32 

Resigned 28 February 2017 

30 

30 

30 

30 

The Company follows the UK Corporate Governance Code’s recommendation that all directors of FTSE 350 companies be subject to annual 
re-appointment by shareholders. 

What happens when an Executive Director leaves? 
Moya Greene’s contract dates from her appointment to the Company in 2010. As disclosed in the Prospectus, her contract may be terminated 
immediately by the Company. Unless the Company terminates the contract due to gross misconduct or a material breach of the obligations 
under the service contract, it would be required to make a payment equalling 12 months’ base salary and an annual cash bonus referable to the 
12 month period in which the termination occurs. The assessment of the annual bonus award would be made in line with normal practice for 
determining bonuses. The bonus provision is not replicated in any other contracts and would not be part of the terms of appointment of a new 
Executive Director. 

Under Matthew Lester’s service contract and the policy for future hires, the Company may terminate the contract by making a payment in lieu of 
any unexpired notice period. The payment in lieu of notice is limited to a maximum of 12 months’ base salary. Matthew Lester will be leaving the 
Company at the end of July and will not receive a payment for loss of office. 

Payment in lieu of accrued holiday, incidental expenses and outplacement services may be paid/provided for as appropriate. Any statutory 
entitlements or sums to settle or compromise claims in connection with a termination (including, at the discretion of the Committee, 
reimbursement for legal advice) would be paid as the Committee considers necessary. 

The Company has an explicit policy on mitigation. Future service contracts for Executive Directors will include express provisions for the use 
of monthly phased payments, a requirement for the departing executive to seek to mitigate any loss and a reduction in amounts paid if the 
executive obtains alternative paid employment.

74 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

The following table sets out the position under the incentive plans on cessation of employment: 

Good Leaver Reason1  Other Reasons2

Committee Discretion 

Annual 
Bonus: Cash 
Awards 

Performance conditions will 
be measured at the bonus 
measurement date. Bonus 
will normally be pro-rated. 

No bonus payable for 
year of cessation. 

Annual 
Bonus: 
Deferred 
Share Awards 

All subsisting deferred 
share awards will normally 
vest on the normal 
vesting date. 

Lapse of any unvested 
deferred share 
awards. 

•  to determine that an executive is a good leaver and 

•  to determine whether to pro-rate the bonus to time. The normal policy is that 

bonus will be pro-rated 

provided that where any discretion is exercised there is an appropriate business 
case which will be explained to shareholders. 

•  to determine that an executive is a good leaver 

•  to vest deferred shares at the date of cessation of employment 

•  to determine whether to pro-rate the award to time. The normal policy for 
existing awards is that they will not be pro-rated; provided that where any 
discretion is exercised there is an appropriate business case which will be 
explained in full to shareholders 

•  In respect of the year of cessation, discretion may be exercised to provide 
a pro-rated deferred share award based on achievement of performance 
conditions as measured at the bonus measurement date. 

LTIP

Pro-rated to time and 
performance in respect of 
each LTIP award. Awards 
will vest on the normal 
vesting date and the holding 
period will apply, except 
in the case of death when 
awards will vest on date of 
cessation of employment 
(and no holding period 
will apply). 

Lapse of any unvested 
LTIP awards. 

•  to determine that an executive is a good leaver 

•  to measure performance over the original performance period or at the date 

of cessation of employment 

•  to vest the shares on date of cessation of employment 

•  to determine whether to pro-rate the award to time. The normal policy is that 

awards will be pro-rated; and 

•  to disapply the holding period 

provided that where any discretion is exercised there is an appropriate business case 
which will be explained in full to shareholders. 

1  A good leaver reason is defined as cessation in the following circumstances:  

death; injury, ill-health or disability, as established to the satisfaction of the Committee, redundancy with the agreement of the Committee, retirement with the agreement of 
the Committee, the company employing the executive ceasing to be a member of the group, the business or part of the business to which the executive’s office or employment 
relates being transferred to a person who is not a member of the group, or any other reason where the Committee in its discretion so permits. 

2  Cessation of employment in circumstances other than those set out above is cessation for other reasons. 

How do the remuneration arrangements for Executive Directors compare with arrangements for 
employees across the Company? 
When making decisions on the levels of remuneration for Executive Directors, the Committee takes account of pay increases and incentive 
awards for all employees. The Company does not use remuneration comparison measurements nor have employees been consulted directly on 
the Policy. 

A range of different incentive and commission schemes operate across the Company, designed to support the delivery of the Company-wide 
annual bonus scorecard, through which the Executive Directors are incentivised. 

How does the change in the Chief Executive's pay compare to that for Royal Mail employees? 
The table below shows the percentage change in the Chief Executive's salary, benefits and annual bonus between 2016-17 and 2015-16, 
compared with the average for all employees across the Group. 

Salary1

Benefits2

Cash Bonus

Chief Executive Officer 
Moya Greene

Average of All Employees 

2016-17

2015-16

% Change

2016-17

2015-16 

% Change3 

£547,800

£547,800

£43,000

£31,000

£439,883

£448,379

0.0%

38.7%

(1.9)%

£28,919

£28,988

£48

£853

£49

£920

(0.2)% 

(1.7)% 

(7.3)% 

1  Full time equivalent salary including overtime and shift allowances. 
2  All taxable benefits. There has been no change to the contractual benefit entitlement for the CEO but she has made use of her financial advice during 2016-17, and the Company 

has paid benefit in kind tax on her flights. 

3  The small reduction in the averages shown for ‘All Employees’ is not due to a reduction in the terms and conditions we offer our employees overall. However, the data is 

impacted by employee turnover and a change in the mix of employees across our grades.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  75

Royal Mail plc 

|  Directors’ remuneration report

What is the Company’s policy on Directors holding external positions? 
It is the Company’s policy to allow each Director to accept one Non-Executive Director position on the board of another company. The fees for 
such appointments are retained by the Executive Directors and are disclosed below. 

Did the Executive Directors receive fees from external positions? 
The Executive Directors are entitled to receive fees from external appointments. Moya Greene has held no paid external appointments for the last 
reported financial year. Matthew Lester is a Non-Executive Director at Man Group plc and received fees of £95,000 for the last reported financial 
year, and of Capita plc, effective 1 March 2017, for which he received fees of £5,375 for the last reported financial year. Exceptionally, a second 
Non-Executive Director appointment was approved for Matthew Lester because the appointment became effective during his notice period.

76 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report on Directors’ Remuneration 
This part of the Directors' Remuneration Report sets out details of how the current Remuneration Policy has been applied for the Financial Year 
2016-17. This detailed information, set out below and on the following pages, has been audited by the Company's independent auditors, KPMG LLP. 

Single figure for total remuneration (audited) 

Salary/ 
Fees

Benefits1 

Annual 
Bonus Plan2 

Deferred 
Share 
Bonus 
Plan3 

Long Term 
Incentive 
Plan4 

Pension 
Allowance5

Other

Total 

2017  2016  2017  2016  2017  2016

2017

2017  2016  2017  2016  2017  2016  2017  2016 

£'000 

Chairman 

Peter Long

300

185

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Executive Directors 

Moya Greene

Matthew Lester

548

475

548

454

43

15

31

15

440

381

448

367

Non‑Executive Directors 

Rita Griffin6

Nick Horler7

Cath Keers

Paul Murray

Orna Ni-Chionna

Les Owen

17

46

50

65

75

60

–

50

50

65

75

60

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

440

0

–

–

–

–

–

–

209

191

302

259

200

190

200

182

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

TOTAL

1,636

1,487

58

46

821

815

440

400

561

390

382

–

0

0

–

–

–

–

–

–

0

–

0

0

–

–

–

–

–

–

0

300

185 

1,880

1,529 

1,252

1,277 

17

46

50

65

75

60

– 

50 

50 

65 

75 

60 

3,745

3,291 

1.  There has been no change to the contractual benefits entitlement which includes medical insurance and car allowance. The figure for Moya Greene also includes return flights 

to Canada. The increase in value for Moya Greene is due to the contractual benefit in kind tax paid on the flights and the use of financial advice. 

2.  Bonuses are determined based on the salary as at 1 January 2017 in line with the Company’s policy for all staff. Bonus payments are made in cash. 
3.  The DSBP is a deferred share award, granted at the end of the annual performance period, the grant being of equal value to the Annual Bonus, and subject to continued 

employment over a three year vesting period. 

4.  The current year figure relates to an estimated vesting of the 2014 LTIP award as shown in the 2014 LTIP Outturn section below. The 2014 LTIP is due to vest in July 2017, once 
the outcome under the TSR metric (which has a performance period that runs from the July 2014 grant date for three calendar years) is known. The prior year figure relates to 
the 2013 LTIP award, which was based on performance to 27 March 2016. 

5.  For Moya Greene, £10,000 is paid into the Royal Mail Defined Contribution Plan and the remaining £190,000 is paid as an allowance. The full amount for Matthew Lester is paid 

as an allowance. 

6.  Rita Griffin was appointed to the Board as a Non-Executive Director on 1 December 2016. 
7.  Nick Horler retired from the Board on 28 February 2017. 

The following sections outline how the data in the table above was determined, with regard to Base Salary and incentives. 

Were Base Salaries reviewed in the year? 
The Committee has considered the relative competitiveness of the current packages for our Executive Directors and decided not to make any increases 
to salary in 2016-17. Moya Greene’s salary has been left unchanged since January 2015. Matthew Lester’s salary was last increased on 1 April 2016. 
This compares to salary increases for frontline staff over the last five years as shown below: 

% increase in salary

2016-17

2015-16

2014-15

2013-14

2012-13 

Moya Greene

Matthew Lester

Average frontline employee

0%

4.6%

1.6%

10%

0%

2.8%

0%

6%

3%

0%

0%

3%

0% 

0% 

3.5% 

Over the last five years, Moya Greene has received total salary increases of 10 per cent and Matthew Lester 10.6 per cent. Our frontline 
employees have received an increase of 13.9 per cent up to 2016-17, with a further salary increase for the coming year still under negotiation. 

What was the outcome of the Annual Cash Bonus? 
The performance period for the Annual Cash Bonus is the same as the financial year, with achievement being assessed against a range of 
financial and non-financial targets, as set out in the Corporate Balanced Scorecard, and against a set of strategic objectives. The maximum cash 
bonus opportunity for the CEO and CFO was 100 per cent of salary.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  77

Royal Mail plc 

|  Directors’ remuneration report

The table below contains a summary of the performance metrics which are used to determine the Annual Bonus award for the CEO and CFO. 
Performance against the Corporate Balanced Scorecard makes up 80 per cent of the bonus for Executive Directors. A further 20 per cent is based 
on strategic objectives set by the Board. 

Corporate Balanced Scorecard 2016-17 

Measure

Weighting

Threshold

Target

Road Traffic Collisions per 1,000 vehicles reduction (%)

Employee Engagement

First Class Retail Quality of Service (%)

Mean Business Customer Satisfaction

Total Customer Complaints (’000)

Productivity for Delivery, Collections & Processing (%)

Total UKPIL Costs (£m)

Total Group Revenue (£m)

Group Operating Profit Before Transformation Costs (£m)

In-year Trading Cashflow (£m)

% of the Scorecard

Scorecard Outcome as % of salary

Strategic Objectives Outcome as % of salary

Annual Bonus as % of salary

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

10%

100%

80%

20%

100%

0

56

–

76

520

2.0

(7,281)

9,322

622

258

7

57

93

76.5

499

2.5

(7,138)

9,512

732

323

53.3% 

13.3%

Max

12

58

93.2

77

476

3.0

(6,995)

9,702

842

388

Actual

Outcome 

12.3

57

93.2

77.8

516.8

2.7

(7,082)

9,455

701

420

18.0%

15.0% 

10.0% 

15.0% 

15.0% 

5.7% 

12.0% 

12.0% 

8.5% 

8.6% 

15.0% 

116.8% 

62.3% 

18.0% 

80.3% 

Financial targets and actuals are based on reported results subject to adjustments approved by the Remuneration Committee. Group revenue and Group operating profit 
before transformation costs are adjusted for foreign exchange movements. Free cash flow excludes net cash flows from the London property portfolio. 

Strategic objectives: Achievement against the Strategic Objectives was assessed by the Chairman and ratified by the Remuneration 
Committee. Performance was determined to be strong due to the finalisation of a very clear strategy being implemented successfully, as follows: 

1.  Articulate the ambition for the Company for the next five years and define the route to achieving that vision 

A five year strategic plan was agreed with the Board and communicated effectively to key stakeholders (including investors, employees, unions 
and the regulator). Following this agreement, the strategy has been progressed by reshaping the UKPIL business to create more focused 
business units, progress has been made on a more efficient labour model and we have established a programme of work to acquire and build 
a global network parcels business: this has included the completion of two successful acquisitions in the USA. In addition we have continued to 
build our know how in Consumer and Data Services while evaluating the potential for Royal Mail to operate as an ‘E-commerce Enabler’. 

2.  Defend the Letters business by managing the cost base of the core network effectively, continuing to transform the business to 

become more efficient, and stemming letters decline through initiatives 
A strategic cost programme was successfully implemented across the Group, as shown by the third consecutive year of achieving our cost 
saving targets. Actions included a 1.9 per cent reduction in core hours, £225 million of cost avoided and significantly improved revenue recovery 
totalling £218 million. This allowed us to keep prices low without impacting our excellent quality of service. A series of collaborative projects 
with the advertising industry helped to slow letter decline. 

3.  Continuing to evolve the Parcels business both in the UK and internationally to win more profitable business in a dynamic and 

highly competitive market place 
In the UK the sales mix improved with full-year UKPIL parcels revenue growth of three per cent compared to one per cent for last year. 
GLS revenue grew by nine per cent in an increasingly competitive market. Cost containment translated this into an increase in profitability 
of 17 per cent. Further deployment of ‘medium’ parcels processing has progressed with the first Parcels Sortation Automation machine now 
live and a further two are undergoing installation. Parcels technology has improved on multiple fronts to support customer convenience. 

4.  Growing in new areas through acquisitions as well as leveraging our existing assets 

The diversification strategy is proving effective with the three substantial acquisitions completed of ASM, GSO and Postal Express (the latter 
completed just after the year-end). ASM is expected to be economic profit accretive in 2018-19, while GSO should be economic profit accretive 
in 2019-20. We continue to build out the pipeline of potential acquisition candidates for 2017-18 and onwards. Amongst other initiatives, 
we established a ‘Fleet’ business unit, offering vehicle maintenance services to third parties, and a new consumer ID service that will be ready 
to launch in 2017-18. 

5.  Continue to refresh our approach to technology, defining a digital strategy which identifies and embraces technology relevant 

for our business’ future 
The Board’s approval of the digital strategy allowed the development of products for customers; market trials for “Tamoco” for doorstep 
delivery instructions and “Glympse” for predicted time of delivery have been implemented. Operational performance was enhanced through the 
deployment of PDAs. The PDA platform can now manage 4.5 million scans an hour, up from 730,000, which supports an increasing proportion 
of parcels (68 per cent) now carrying a barcode. 

78 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

When added to the outcome of the Corporate Balanced Scorecard, the total bonus value, and the percentage of salary, were as follows:-

Moya Greene: £439,883, 80 per cent of salary. 
Matthew Lester: £381,425, 80 per cent of salary. 

Additionally, in line with the Remuneration Policy and subject to Committee approval, this performance outturn determines the value of the 
deferred share award to be granted to the CEO, equal to the value of her bonus. This award will vest in three years. 

What was the outturn of the 2014 LTIP? 
The 2014 award was based on achievement against two performance conditions to be achieved by 26 March 2017 and a third condition, TSR, 
to be achieved by July 2017. The tables below show the performance conditions and the vesting of this plan. However, overall performance 
of the plan will be finalised ahead of the vesting in July 2017. Performance targets for the 2014 LTIP were not previously published due to 
commercial sensitivity. 

Performance conditions: 

Performance 
conditions

Weighting  Definition 

Earnings per share 
("EPS") 

50%

Operating profit 
margin before 
transformation costs 

35%

15%

Total Shareholder 
Return ("TSR") versus 
FTSE 100 comparator 
group 

Growth in ‘Basic EPS 
excluding specific items’ 
as reported in the Annual 
Report and Accounts 
of the Company  from a 
base of 26.3 pence 

Operating profit margin 
before transformation 
costs as reported in 
the Annual Report and 
Accounts of the Company 

The change in the 
Net Return Index 
(as calculated by an 
independent financial 
information provider) 
for Royal Mail compared 
with the ranked Net 
Return Indices of the 
comparator group. 

Threshold

Maximum 

Target 
measurement 
period 

Financial year 
2016-17 

Target 

34.1 pence per 
share   
(9% Compound 
Annual Growth 
Rate) 

Vesting 
(% of award)  Target 

Vesting 
(% of award) 

12.50%

50% 

46.6 pence per 
share  
(21% Compound 
Annual Growth 
Rate) 

Financial year 
2016-17 

6%

8.75%

7.50%

35% 

Median

7.50%

Top Quartile

15% 

3 calendar years 
from the date 
of grant of the 
award1 

1.  TSR calculation: 

TSR2 – TSR1. 
TSR1 

TSR1 is its average Net Return Index over each weekday (excluding Saturdays) during the three months period ending on the first day of the TSR Performance Period. 
TSR2 is its average Net Return Index over each weekday (excluding Saturdays) during the three months period ending on the last day of the TSR Performance Period. 

Actual achievement: 

Performance conditions

Earnings per share (“EPS”) 

Threshold

34.1pps  
(9% CAGR) 

Maximum

46.6pps 
(21% CAGR) 

Outcome 

38.0pps 
(13.1% CAGR) 

Operating profit margin before 
transformation costs

Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”) 
versus FTSE 100 comparator group 

6%

7.5%

6.8%

Median

Top Quartile

Estimated Below Threshold 

Vesting 
(as % of Max) 

Estimated 2014 
LTIP Vesting 
(as % of Max) 

24% 

22% 

46%

The 2014 LTIP is due to vest in July 2017, once the outcome under the TSR metric (which has a performance period that runs from the July 2014 
grant date for three calendar years) is known. Using the latest available data for the TSR metric, the plan is likely to vest in July 2017 between 
46 per cent and 53.5 per cent of maximum.  

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  79

Royal Mail plc 

|  Directors’ remuneration report

What previous LTIP awards remain outstanding at the year end? (audited) 
The grants made for the 2015 LTIP and the 2016 LTIP remain outstanding. The performance conditions for the 2015 LTIP are: 

Threshold

Maximum 

Measure

EPS

Operating profit margin before transformation 
costs*

TSR versus FTSE 100  
(excluding mining & financial companies)

50% 

35%

15%

Weighting 

Performance 

Vesting 
(% of award)

40.8 pence 
achieved in respect 
of 2017-18 financial 
year 

12.5% 

–

8.75%

–

Performance 

44.7 pence 
achieved in respect 
of 2017-18 financial 
year 

Vesting 
(% of award) 

50% 

35% 

Median

7.5%

Top Quartile

15% 

*The precise figures are deemed to be commercially sensitive but will be disclosed on vesting of the award. 

The performance conditions for the 2016 LTIP are: 

Measure

Weighting 

Performance 

Vesting 
(% of award)

Performance 

Vesting 
(% of award) 

TSR versus FTSE 100 
(excluding mining & financial companies)

100%

Median

50%

Top Quartile

100% 

Threshold

Maximum 

The amount of the LTIP awards outstanding, for each of the Executive Directors, is shown in the following table, as at 26 March 2017: 

Executive Director

Moya Greene 

Matthew Lester 

Year

2015

2016

2015

2016

Type 

LTIP shares

LTIP shares

LTIP shares

LTIP shares

Maximum 
value of 
award 
at grant 
(% salary) 

Maximum 
value of 
award 
at grant 
(£’000) 

% vesting at 
threshold 
performance 
(% of salary) 

98%

100%

98%

100%

537

548

445

475

28%

50%

28%

50%

Final year of 
performance 
period 

Number of 
shares 

2017-18

105,057 

2018-19

107,800 

2017-18

2018-19

87,080 

93,474 

It should be noted that, on Matthew Lester’s cessation of employment, his 2015 and 2016 LTIP awards will lapse. See page 81 for 
additional details.

80 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Following these LTIP awards, what are the current shareholding levels of the Board? (audited) 
The table below sets out details of the shareholdings of the Executive and Non-Executive Directors as at 26 March 2017. There has been no 
change in the Directors’ interests in the ordinary share capital of the Company between 26 March 2017 and 25 May 2017 except as noted in (2) 
and (3) below. 

Shareholding 
Requirement 

Number of 
shares owned 
outright on 
26/03/17 

Number of 
shares owned 
outright on 
27/03/16 

Value of 
shares owned 
outright on 
26/03/171 

Number 
of options 
granted under 
SAYE plan 

Chairman 

Peter Long

Executive Directors 

Moya Greene

Matthew Lester

Non‑Executive Directors 

Rita Griffin

Nick Horler

Cath Keers

Paul Murray

Orna Ni-Chionna

Les Owen

–

100,000

50,000

–

200%

200%

–

–

–

–

–

–

40,173

30,591

–

3,466

3,030

15,770

13,217

3,030

3,862

3,862

–

3,313

3,030

15,617

3,313

3,030

£168,767

£128,513

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

590

590

–

–

–

–

–

–

1 Value based on closing share price on 26/03/17. 
2 Includes the DSBP to be granted in respect of the 2016-17 Annual Bonus. 
3 Shares include those which are subsequently due to vest following the end of performance period in July 2017. 

Data is reported prior to the sale of shares required to cover tax obligations. 

Value of 
conditional 
share awards 
not subject to 
performance 
conditions 
(DSBP)2 

Conditional 
share awards 
subject to 
performance 
conditions 
(LTIP 2014, 
2015, 2016)3 

–

– 

£439,883

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

321,214 

279,351 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

The impact of pre-IPO LTIP awards vesting in cash rather than shares means that it will take some time for the Executive Directors to achieve the 
minimum required level of shareholding guideline. 

Were any payments made for loss of office? 
As mentioned elsewhere, our CFO, Matthew Lester has decided to leave the business this July, after nearly seven years of service with the 
Company. Other than for the award vesting this year, his outstanding LTIP awards will lapse in accordance with the plan rules, and he will not 
be eligible for the award of deferred shares that forms part of the 2016-17 bonus. He will also not receive any payment for loss of office. The 
Committee determined that he would be eligible for the cash element of the 2016-17 Annual Bonus given that he was employed for the full 
financial year; and the Committee also agreed that his 2014 LTIP award, subject to the achievement of performance conditions, would be capable 
of vesting given that he was employed by the Company for the whole of the performance period. The Committee took the view that this was 
justifiable on account of his dedicated service to the Company throughout his notice period. It has been to the Company’s advantage that he gave 
us more than his contractual notice in order for us to plan succession. 

Were any payments made to past Directors during the year? 
No payments were made to past Directors during the year. 

What has the pay for the CEO been over the last eight years? 
The total remuneration figure for the Chief Executive over the last eight years is shown in the table below. The annual bonus payout and the LTIP 
vesting level as a percentage of the maximum opportunity are also shown. 

2009-10  2010-11 

2010-11 

2011-12 

2012-13  2013-14 

2014-15 

2015-16 

2016-17 

Chief Executive Officer

Adam Crozier  Adam Crozier  Moya Greene  Moya Greene  Moya Greene  Moya Greene  Moya Greene  Moya Greene  Moya Greene 

Total Remuneration (£'000)

858

2,428

Annual Bonus awarded as 
% maximum 

LTIP vesting as % 
maximum 

–

–

–

100%

778

41%

–

1,107

1,962

1,360

1,522

1,529

1,880 

74%

80%

77%

85%

82%

 80% 

–

100%

100%

69%

59%

 46%

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  81

Royal Mail plc 

|  Directors’ remuneration report

How does TSR compare to that 
of other similar companies? 
Total Shareholder Return (TSR) is the measure 
of the returns that a company has generated 
for its shareholders, reflecting both movement 
in the share price and dividends, which are 
assumed to be reinvested, over a period of time. 
The graph shows the TSR of the Company, since 
the date of the first day of trading, relative to 
the FTSE 100 Index. The FTSE 100 Index has 
been chosen for comparison as the Company 
has been a constituent of the Index for the 
majority of the period shown, and it provides 
a benchmark of the performance of other large 
UK listed companies. 

)
d
e
s
a
b
e
r
(

n
r
u
t
e
R
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

l

l

a
t
o
T

180 

160 

140 

120 

100 

80 

60 

40 

20 

0 

171 

104 

140 

112

157 

104 

145 

130 

11th October 
2013 

30th March 
2014 

29th March 
2015 

27th March 
2016 

26th March 
2017 

Royal Mail

FTSE 100 

TSR over the Financial Year

FY 2013-14*

FY 2014-15

FY 2015-16

FY 2016-17 

Royal Mail plc

FTSE 100

71%

4%

(18)%

7%

12%

(7)%

(8)% 

 25% 

*  The chart and table show performance since the first day of conditional trading following the IPO (11 October 2013); in accordance with the Code, they will show an increasing 

timeframe in the coming years. 

How much does Royal Mail  
spend on pay? 
The chart shows the Company's actual 
spend on pay (for all employees) relative 
to dividends, revenue and operating profit. 
Revenue has been included because this 
measure represents the amount of money 
the Company received during the year and 
provides a clear illustration of the ratio of 
people costs to income. 

10,000 

9,000 

8,000 

7,000 

6,000 

m
£

5,000 

4,000 

3,000 

2,000 

1,000 

0 

2016-17

2015-16 

Revenue 

2015-16
2016-17
Adjusted People Costs

2016-17

2015-16

Adjusted Operating Profit

2015-16
2016-17
Declared Dividends

Note: the data used for Revenue and Adjusted Operating Profit in the chart is not adjusted for foreign exchange 
movement, which is included in the outturn for the Scorecard.

82 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Which of the Board members sit on the Remuneration Committee, and how frequently do they meet? 
The members of the Committee are shown in the table below. 

Number of meetings eligible to attend

Number of meetings attended 

Total number of meetings 

Chair 

Orna Ni-Chionna

Members 

Peter Long

Paul Murray

Les Owen

7

7

7

7

7 

7 

7 

7 

Role of the Remuneration Committee 
• 

to determine and recommend for the Board’s approval the framework for the remuneration of the senior executives of the Group; 

• 

to determine the individual remuneration arrangements for the Chairman, the Executive Directors, the Company Secretary and the members 
of the Chief Executive’s Committee; and 

• 

to agree the targets for any performance-related incentive schemes applicable to senior executives. 

The full Terms of Reference for the Committee can be found on our website:  
http://www.royalmailgroup.com/about-us/management-and-committees/remuneration-committee. 

Does the Remuneration Committee seek advice from internal and external advisors? 
The Committee takes information and advice from inside and outside the Company. Internal support was provided by Jon Millidge, the Group 
HR Director (supported by other members of the HR department and senior leadership as appropriate) and Kulbinder Dosanjh, the Company 
Secretary. No individual was present when matters relating to his or her own remuneration were discussed. 

The Committee seeks advice from independent external advisors as appropriate. The appointed advisors, PwC, were selected through a 
competitive tendering process, led by the Chair of the Remuneration Committee, and appointed in October 2014. PwC provided information to the 
Committee regarding external market trends and advice on executive remuneration design. The total fees paid for advice to the Committee were 
£112,640. 

PwC has provided tax, technology, finance, operations, and other HR, commercial and strategic consulting services to the Group during the 
financial year. 

PwC are signatories to the Remuneration Consultants Group Code of Conduct and report directly to the Chair of the Committee. The Chair of the 
Committee meets regularly with its advisers without Management present. The Committee is satisfied that the advice it receives is objective 
and independent. 

2016 Voting By Shareholders 
The table below shows the advisory vote on the 2015-16 Remuneration Report at the AGM on 21 July 2016 and the vote on the new 
Remuneration Policy, effective immediately from the date of the AGM, and for up to three years. 

Votes For

% For

Votes 
Against 

% Against

Total Votes 
Cast 

Votes withheld 
(abstentions) 

Approval of Remuneration Report

586,759,324

96.58%

20,795,146

Approval of Remuneration Policy

523,665,626

83.46%

103,807,987

3.42%

16.54%

607,554,470

627,473,613

27,633,259 

7,731,040 

The Remuneration Committee feels that the strong level of support for the new Policy does not require the Committee to make any changes to 
its implementation for the next financial year. The reasons for the votes against the Policy in 2016 primarily related to a minority of shareholders 
who did not support the increase in potential compensation related to short term performance or the sole use of TSR as a performance 
condition for the LTIP. 

Approved by the Board on 17 May 2017 and signed by 

Orna Ni-Chionna 
Chair, Remuneration Committee

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  83

Royal Mail plc 

|  Directors’ report

Directors’ report 

The Directors present their report together with audited financial 
statements for the year ended 26 March 2017. 

Strategic report 
To enable the assessment of how the 
Directors have performed their duty to 
promote the success of the Company, the 
Companies Act 2006 requires the Directors 
to set out in this report a fair review of 
the business of the Group during the year, 
the position of the Group at the end of the 
year and a description of the principal risks 
facing the Group. This information can be 
found in the following sections of the Annual 
Report and Financial Statements and are 
incorporated by reference. 

The information required to be disclosed in 
the Annual Report under Listing Rule 9.8.4R 
is marked with an asterisk below. 

Index

Business model

Strategy for delivering objectives

Results

Financial assets and liabilities

Principal risks

Corporate responsibility

Greenhouse gas emissions

Disabled employees

Our people

Going concern

Viability statement

Page 

14 

16 

4 

96 

37 

43 

46 

44 

43 

99 

41 

Long-Term Incentive Plans*

120 

Statement of the amount of interest 
capitalised* 

116 and 
118 

Dividend waiver*

84 

Disclosure and 
Transparency Rules 
The Strategic Report and the Directors’ 
Report together include the management 
report required by DTR 4.1 of the Disclosure 
Guidance and Transparency Rules of the 
UK Financial Conduct Authority (Disclosure 
Guidance and Transparency Rules), the 
Directors having consulted with the 
Management on such matters. 

Corporate governance statement 
The Disclosure Guidance and Transparency 
Rules require certain information to 
be included in a Corporate Governance 
Statement in the Directors’ Report. This 
information can be found in the Statement of 
Corporate Governance on pages 54-58 and 
is incorporated into this Directors’ Report 
by reference. 

Shares 
Final dividend 
The Board recommends a final dividend 
of 15.6 pence per ordinary share, giving a 
total dividend for the year of 23.0 pence 
per ordinary share. The final dividend will 
be payable on 28 July 2017, subject to 
shareholder approval, to shareholders whose 
names appear on the register of members on 
30 June 2017. 

Dividends and distribution 
The Company may by ordinary resolution 
from time-to-time declare dividends not 
exceeding the amount recommended by 
the Board. Subject to the Companies Act 
2006, the Board may pay interim dividends, 
and also any fixed rate dividend, whenever 
the financial position of the Company, in 
the opinion of the Directors, justifies its 
payment. If the Board acts in good faith, it is 
not liable to holders of shares with preferred 
or pari passu rights for losses arising from 
the payment of interim or fixed dividends 
on other shares. All dividends shall be 
apportioned and paid pro rata according to 
the amounts paid up on the shares. 

Dividend waivers 
The trustee of the Royal Mail Share Incentive 
Plan will not receive any dividends (other 
than any special dividend declared by the 
Board) on Free Shares which it has not been 
possible to award to, or which have been 
forfeited by, participants in the plan. 

Political donations 
No political donations were made during the 
year and the Company intends to continue its 
policy of not making such donations for the 
foreseeable future. 

Future developments 
Possible future developments are described 
in Our Strategy on pages 16-17 and Principal 
Risks on pages 37-41 of the Strategic Report. 

84 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Share capital 
As at 27 March 2017, the Company’s issued 
share capital comprised 1,000,000,000 
ordinary shares of one penny each as set out 
in Note 23 to the accounts on page 129. 

A block listing of 5,000,000 shares was 
undertaken in November 2014. To date, no 
new shares have been issued. 

Rights and obligations attaching to shares 
Voting 
Subject to the provisions of the Articles, and 
to any special rights or restrictions as to 
voting attached to any class of shares in the 
Company (of which there is none), members 
will be entitled to vote at a general meeting 
as follows: 

•  On a show of hands, every member 

present in person has one vote. Every 
proxy present who has been duly 
appointed by appointing one or more 
members will have one vote, except 
that a proxy has one vote for and one 
vote against if the proxy has been duly 
appointed by more than one member and 
the proxy has been instructed by one or 
more members to vote for and by one or 
more other members to vote against. 

•  For this purpose, the Articles provide that, 
where a proxy is given discretion as to 
how to vote on a show of hands, this will 
be treated as an instruction by the relevant 
member to vote in the way that the proxy 
decides to exercise that discretion. 

•  On a poll, every member has one vote per 
share held by them and they may vote 
in person or by appointing one or more 
proxies. Where they appoint more than 
one proxy, the proxies appointed, taken 
together, shall not have more extensive 
voting rights than the member could 
exercise in person. 

In the case of joint holders of a share, the 
vote of the senior holder who tenders a 
vote, whether in person or by proxy, shall 
be accepted to the exclusion of the votes of 
the other joint holders and, for this purpose, 
seniority shall be determined by the order 
in which the names stand in the register in 
respect of the joint holding. 

No member shall be entitled to vote at any 
general meeting or class meeting in respect 
of any share held by him, or her, if any call 
or other sum then payable by him or her in 
respect of that share remains unpaid or if a 
member has been served with a restriction 
notice (as defined in the Articles) after failure 
to provide the Company with information 
concerning interests in those shares required 

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

to be provided under the Companies Act 2006. 
Currently, all issued shares are fully paid. 

Voting instructions may be submitted 
electronically at www.sharevote.co.uk by 
following the online instructions. 

Authority of the Directors to allot shares 
By a resolution passed by shareholders on 
21 July 2016, at the AGM, the Directors were 
authorised, subject to certain limitations, 
to allot shares in the Company and to grant 
rights to subscribe for or to convert any 
security into shares in the Company: 

Substantial shareholdings 
As at 26 March 2017, the Company had been 
notified, in accordance with the Disclosure 
Guidance and Transparency Rules, of the 
following interests amounting to three per 
cent or more of the voting rights in the issued 
ordinary share capital of the Company: 

Employees allocated Free Shares under the 
Employee Free Shares Offer, which are held 
in trust by the Trustee of the Royal Mail Share 
Incentive Plan, are entitled to exercise any 
voting rights in respect of such Free Shares 
by instructing the Trustee how to vote on 
their behalf. 

a. 

b. 

Deadline for voting rights 
Full details of the deadlines for exercising 
voting rights in respect of the resolutions 
to be considered at the AGM, to be held on 
20 July 2017, will be set out in the Notice 
of AGM. 

Special rights 
There are no persons holding securities that 
carry special rights with regard to the control 
of the Group. 

Transfer of shares 
Subject to the Articles, any member may 
transfer all or any of his or her certificated 
shares by an instrument of transfer in any 
usual form or in any other form which the 
Board may approve. The instrument of 
transfer must be signed by or on behalf of the 
transferor and (in the case of a partly-paid 
share) the transferee. 

The transferor of a share is deemed to remain 
the holder until the transferee’s name is 
entered in the register. 

The Board can decline to register any transfer 
of any share which is not a fully paid share. 
The Board may also decline to register a 
transfer of a certificated share unless the 
instrument of transfer: 

i. 

is duly stamped or certified or otherwise 
shown to the satisfaction of the Board 
to be exempt from stamp duty and is 
accompanied by the relevant share 
certificate and such other evidence of 
the right to transfer as the Board may 
reasonably require; 

ii.  is in respect of only one class of share; and 

iii.  if to joint transferees, is in favour of not 

more than four such transferees. 

Registration of a transfer of an uncertificated 
share may be refused in the circumstances 
set out in the uncertificated securities rules 
(as defined in the Articles) and where, 
in the case of a transfer to joint holders, 
the number of joint holders to whom the 
uncertificated share is to be transferred 
exceeds four. 

up to a nominal amount of 
£3,333,333; and 

comprising equity securities up to a 
nominal amount of £6,666,666 (such 
amount to be reduced by any allotments 
made under paragraph (a) above) in 
connection with an offer by way of a 
rights issue; 

The authorities conferred on the Directors 
to allot securities under paragraph (a) 
and (b) will expire on the date of the 2017 
AGM or close of business on 31 July 2016, 
whichever is sooner, (the ‘Expiry Date’). 
The Directors will be seeking a new authority 
for the Directors to allot shares and to 
grant subscription and conversion rights to 
ensure that the Directors continue to have 
the flexibility to act in the best interests of 
shareholders when opportunities arise by 
issuing new shares or granting such rights. 

The Board was also given authority to allot 
equity securities for cash or to sell Ordinary 
Shares as treasury shares for cash subject 
to certain limitations, such authority to apply 
until the Expiry Date. 

Purchase of own shares by the Company 
By a resolution passed by shareholders on 
21 July 2016, at the AGM, the Company was 
authorised to purchase up to a maximum 
number of 100,000,000 of its Ordinary Shares 
pursuant to certain limitations, such power 
to apply until the Expiry Date. The Company 
did not repurchase any of its Ordinary Shares 
during the year ended 26 March 2017. 

The Directors require express authorisation 
from shareholders to purchase our own 
shares. Accordingly, at the 2017 AGM, 
the Directors will seek authority to make 
market purchases of up to a maximum of 
ten per cent of issued share capital. At the 
present time, the Company has no plans to 
exercise this authority. 

Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) 
As at 26 March 2017, a total of 9,582,175 
(2015-16 27,042) shares were held by the 
EBT on behalf of the Company. 

Shareholder

Number of 
shares 

% of 
voting 
rights 

BlackRock, Inc

55,076,360

5.50% 

As at 18 May 2017, the Company had been 
notified, in accordance with the Disclosure 
and Transparency Rules, of the following 
interests amounting to three per cent or 
more of the voting rights in the issued 
ordinary share capital of the Company: 

Shareholder

Number of 
shares 

% of 
voting 
rights 

BlackRock, Inc

55,076,360

5.50% 

Amendment to the Company’s Articles 
of Association 
Any amendments to the Company’s Articles 
may be made in accordance with the 
provisions of the Companies Act 2006 by way 
of special resolution. 

Directors 
Indemnity of Directors 
To the extent permitted by the Companies 
Acts, the Company may indemnify any 
Director or former Director of the Company 
or any associated company against any 
liability and may purchase and maintain 
for any Director or former Director of the 
Company or any associated company 
insurance against any liability. 

These types of indemnity are qualifying 
third-party indemnities as defined by section 
243 of the Companies Act 2006. No amount 
was paid under this provision during the year. 

Appointment and replacement 
of Directors 
Unless otherwise determined by ordinary 
resolution of the Company, the Directors 
shall be no fewer than two and no more than 
15 in number. 

Directors may be appointed by the Company 
by ordinary resolution or by the Board. 

In accordance with the Code, all Directors 
of the Company are subject to annual 
re-election.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  85

A Director appointed by the Board holds 
office only until the next AGM and is then 
eligible for election by the shareholders. 
The Company’s Articles provide that, at each 
AGM, all those Directors who have been in 
office at the time of the two preceding AGMs 
and who did not retire at either of them, or 
who have held office with the Company, other 
than employment or executive office, for a 
continuous period of nine years or more at 
the date of the AGM, shall retire from office 
and may offer themselves for re-appointment 
by shareholders. The Board has, however, 
decided to follow the Code as referred to 
above so that all Directors are subject to 
annual re-election. 

In addition to any power of removal conferred 
by the Companies Act 2006, the Company 
may by special resolution remove any 
Director before the expiration of his or her 
period of office. 

Directors and their interests 
The Directors of the Company during the 
year are given on pages 49–51. Details of the 
interest of the Directors and, where applicable, 
their Connected Persons in the Ordinary 
Shares of the Company and of Long-Term 
Incentive Plan Awards over Ordinary Shares 
of the Company are set out in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on pages 66-83. 

There are procedures in place to deal with 
any conflicts of interest and these have 
operated effectively. 

Powers of the Directors 
The business of the Company will be 
managed by the Board who may exercise all 
the powers of the Company, subject to the 
provisions of the Articles, the Companies 
Act 2006 and any ordinary resolution of 
the Company. 

Directors’ annual bonus and Long Term 
Incentive Plan awards upon a change 
in the control of the Company 
Upon a change of control of the Company, 
share awards under the annual bonus and 
vesting under the 2014 LTIP or 2016 LTIP 
arrangements could pay out on a pro-rated 
basis if the performance conditions have 
been met. The performance-testing period 
would automatically end on the date of the 
change in control. Awards granted less 
than 12 months prior to a change in control 
would typically be pro-rated, unless the 
Remuneration Committee decides otherwise. 

Events after the reporting period 
The events after the reporting period 
are disclosed in Note 27 of the 
financial statements. 

Financial risk management 
The Group’s financial risk management 
objectives and policies and the main risks 
arising from the Group’s financial assets and 
liabilities are summarised in Note 21 to the 
accounts on page 123. See the financial risks 
and related hedging contained on page 31 of 
the Financial Review in the Strategic Report. 

Change of control 
The following agreements contain provisions 
permitting exercise of termination or other 
rights in the event of a change of control: 

•  The Mails Distribution Agreement with 

Post Office Limited provides for the supply 
of certain services to the Group and allows 
for a request for renegotiation of terms in 
the event of a change of control of either 
party where such change of control is 
likely to have a material adverse effect 
on the party not undergoing the change 
of control. 

•  The Syndicated Loan Facility with various 
financial institutions provides the Group 
with a revolving credit facility for general 
corporate and working capital purposes. 
The agreement contains provision on 
a change of control of the Group for 
negotiation of the continuation of the 
agreement or cancellation by a lender. 

•  The €500 million bond issued by the 

Company in July 2014 contains provisions 
such that, on a change of control that is 
combined with a credit rating downgrade 
in certain circumstances, the noteholders 
may require the Company to redeem or, 
at the Company’s option, purchase the 
notes for their principal amount, together 
with interest accrued to (but excluding) 
the date of redemption or repurchase. 

Branches 
As a global Group, our interests and 
activities are held or operated through 
subsidiaries, branches, joint arrangements 
or associates which are established in, 
and subject to the laws and regulations of, 
many different jurisdictions. 

New products and services 
In the ordinary course of business, the Group 
develops new products and services in each 
of its business units. 

Environmental social and 
governance risks 
The Strategic Report, together with 
greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions which are 
located on page 46, set out key 
environmental, social and governance (ESG) 
risks faced by the business. 

The Board identifies and assesses significant 
risks, including those relating to ESG matters, 
through the maintenance and review of the 
Group Risk Profile. This contains significant 
current risks, including ESG risks, which are 
identified at an early stage of becoming known 
as part of the long-term business perspective. 
Emerging risk identification is conducted by 
experts in the business and risk management 
is owned and managed at the operational 
level, supported centrally. An independent 
effectiveness review by an independent 
external auditor confirmed good links between 
the strategy of the Company and currently 
identified risks and that appropriate 
importance is placed on risk management by 
executives within the Group. The Company 
maintains a range of policies and procedures 
for managing business risks, which include 
ESG-related matters. 

The Board annually reviews the Company’s 
Corporate Responsibility Report, which 
covers in detail the Group’s non-financial 
ESG performance. The report is prepared 
in alignment with the reporting framework 
of the Global Reporting Initiative Index and 
the Company’s performance is assessed 
against international sustainability indices. 
The Company reports progress against 
corporate responsibility objectives under 
five areas: Customer, People, Community, 
Suppliers and Environment. See also page 43 
for a summary of key corporate 
responsibility aspects. 

Going concern 
These consolidated financial statements have 
been prepared on a going concern basis. 
The financial performance and position of 
the Group, its cash flows and its approach 
to capital management are set out in the 
Financial review on pages 21-36. The Board 
has reviewed the Group’s projections for the 
next 12 months and the Directors have a 
reasonable expectation that the Group has 
adequate resources to continue in operational 
existence for at least 12 months. 

Viability Statement 
The Viability Statement can be viewed on 
page 41 of the Strategic Report. 

Audit information 
The Directors confirm that, so far as 
they are aware, there is no relevant audit 
information (as defined in section 418 of the 
Companies Act 2006) of which the Auditor 
is unaware and that each Director has taken 
all reasonable steps to make themselves 
aware of any relevant audit information and 
to establish that the Auditor is aware of 
that information.

86 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

The Directors confirm full compliance with 
the Competition and Markets Authority’s 
Statutory Audit Services Order. Further 
information about the audit transition can 
be found on page 61 of the Audit and Risk 
Committee Report. 

This confirmation is given and should be 
interpreted in accordance with the provisions 
of section 418 of the Companies Act 2006. 

Disclaimer 
The Disclaimer can be found on page 152 of 
the Report. 

By Order of the Board. 

Kulbinder Dosanjh 
Company Secretary 
17 May 2017 

Royal Mail plc 
100 Victoria Embankment 
London 
EC4Y OHQ 

Company number 08680755 

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Statement of Directors’ 
responsibilities in respect of the 
Annual Report and Financial 
Statements 

The Directors are responsible for preparing 
the Annual Report and the Group and parent 
Company financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare Group and parent Company financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that 
law, they are required to prepare the Group 
financial statements in accordance with IFRS 
as adopted by the EU and applicable law, and 
have elected to prepare the parent Company 
financial statements in accordance with UK 
Accounting Standards, including FRS 101 
‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’. 

Under company law, the Directors must not 
approve the financial statements unless they 
are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the Group and 
parent Company and of their profit or loss for 
that period. In preparing each of the Group 
and parent Company financial statements, 
the Directors are required to: 

•  select suitable accounting policies and then 

apply them consistently; 

•  make judgements and estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent; 

• 

• 

for the Group financial statements, state 
whether they have been prepared in 
accordance with IFRS as adopted by the EU; 

for the parent Company financial statements, 
state whether applicable UK Accounting 
Standards have been followed, subject 
to any material departures disclosed and 
explained in the parent Company financial 
statements; and 

•  prepare the financial statements on the 

going concern basis unless it is inappropriate 
to presume that the Group and the parent 
Company will continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are 
sufficient to show and explain the parent 
Company’s transactions and disclose 
with reasonable accuracy at any time the 
financial position of the parent Company 
and enable them to ensure that its financial 
statements comply with the Companies 
Act 2006. They have general responsibility 
for taking such steps as are reasonably 
open to them to safeguard the assets of the 
Group and to prevent and detect fraud and 
other irregularities. 

Under applicable law and regulations, the 
Directors are also responsible for preparing a 
Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, Directors’ 
Remuneration Report and Corporate 
Governance Statement that complies with 
that law and those regulations. 

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the corporate 
and financial information included on the 
Company’s website. Legislation in the UK 
governing the preparation and dissemination 
of financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions. 

The Directors consider that the Annual 
Report and Financial Statements 2016-17, 
when taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the 
Group’s position and performance, business 
model and strategy. 

Each of the Directors, whose names and 
function are set out on pages 49-51 confirm 
that, to the best of their knowledge: 

• 

• 

the financial statements, which have been 
prepared in accordance with the applicable 
set of accounting standards, give a true 
and fair view of the assets, liabilities, 
financial position and profit or loss of the 
Company and the undertakings included in 
the consolidation taken as a whole; and 

the Strategic Report includes a fair review 
of the development and performance 
of the business and the position of the 
Company and the undertakings included 
in the consolidation taken as a whole, 
together with a description of the principal 
risks and uncertainties that they face.

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  87

Royal Mail plc 

| 

Financial  
statements 

Independent Auditor’s Report to the members of Royal Mail plc ................. 89 
Consolidated income statement ............................................................................. 94 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income........................................... 95 
Consolidated balance sheet..................................................................................... 96 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity..................................................... 97 
Consolidated statement of cash flows .................................................................. 98 

Core notes to the financial statements...................................................................... 
1. Basis of preparation................................................................................................. 99 
2. Segment information ............................................................................................100 
3. Operating costs.......................................................................................................102 
4. People information.................................................................................................103 
5. Net finance costs ....................................................................................................104 
6. Taxation....................................................................................................................104 
7. Earnings per share.................................................................................................107 
8. Dividends.................................................................................................................108 
9. Retirement benefit plans.......................................................................................108 
10. Acquisition of businesses ....................................................................................114 

Other notes to the financial statements.................................................................... 
11. Property, plant and equipment..........................................................................115 
12. Goodwill.................................................................................................................117 
13. Intangible assets ..................................................................................................118 
14. Investments in associates and joint venture....................................................118 
15. Share-based payments ......................................................................................119 
16. Assets and liabilities held for sale......................................................................121 
17. Current trade and other receivables .................................................................121 
18. Cash and cash equivalents .................................................................................122 
19. Current trade and other payables .....................................................................122 
20. Loans and borrowings ........................................................................................122 
21. Financial assets and liabilities and risk management ....................................123 
22. Provisions..............................................................................................................128 
23. Share capital and reserves.................................................................................129 
24. Commitments.......................................................................................................130 
25. Contingent liabilities ............................................................................................130 
26. Related party information ..................................................................................131 
27. Events after the reporting year .........................................................................131 
28. Related undertakings of Royal Mail plc ............................................................132 

Significant accounting policies .............................................................................136 
Royal Mail plc – parent Company financial statements .................................146

88 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Independent auditor’s 
report 

to the members of Royal Mail plc only. 

Opinions and conclusions arising from our audit 

1.  Our opinion on the financial statements 

Overview 

is unmodified 

We have audited the financial statements of Royal Mail plc for 
the 52 weeks ended 26 March 2017 set out on pages 94 to 148. 
In our opinion: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the 
Group’s and of the parent Company’s affairs as at 26 March 2017 
and of the Group’s profit for the 52 weeks then ended; 

the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in 
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as 
adopted by the European Union; 

the parent Company financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with UK Accounting Standards, including 
FRS 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework and 

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with 
the requirements of the Companies Act 2006; and, as regards the 
group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. 

Materiality: 
Group financial 
statements as a 
whole 

Coverage

£20 million (2015-16: £18 million) 

5% (2015-16: 5%) of Group profit 
before tax excluding certain items* 

100% (2015-16: 100%) of Group profit 
before tax 

Risks of material misstatement

vs 2015-16 

Recurring risks

Deferred revenue

Valuation of pension 
scheme liabilities 

Industrial disease claims 
provision 

Event driven

Ofcom investigation 
contingent liability (recurring risk) 

Acquisition accounting 
(new risk) 

◀▶ 

◀▶ 

◀▶ 

◀▶ 

▲ 

*Items added back to Group profit before tax are the IFRS 2 charge 
for employee free shares issued (2016-17: £105 million, 2015-16: 
£158 million), loss on disposal of business (2016-17: £2 million, 
2015-16: £nil) and net of profit on disposal of property, plant and 
equipment (2016-17: £14 million, 2015-16: £29 million).

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  89

Royal Mail plc 

| 

Independent auditor’s report

2.  Our assessment of risks of material misstatement 
In arriving at our audit opinion above on the financial statements, the risks of material misstatement that had the greatest effect on our audit, in 
decreasing order of audit significance, were as follows: 

Deferred revenue associated with 
advance customer payments arising from 
stamps sold 
£184 million (2015-16: £195 million) 

Refer to page 60 (Audit Committee Report), 
page 136 (accounting policy) and page 122 
(financial disclosures). 

The risk

Subjective estimate 
Deferred revenue is estimated for advance 
payments made by households who purchase 
stamps in advance of actual usage. The Group 
estimates the amounts that have been sold 
but not used at year end and defers revenue 
to reflect the fact that that the service will 
need to be provided by the Group during future 
accounting periods for pre-purchased stamps. 

As no unique identification of the stamps 
unused is possible, the calculation and 
methodology of the advance customer 
payments balance is inherently subjective 
by nature and is based on inputs including 
third party surveys and Group sales data. 
The methodology adjusts for stamp holdings 
which are considered to be abnormal. 

Valuation of pension scheme liabilities 
(£3,839 million surplus, net of £5,992 million 
liability; 2015-16: £3,430 million surplus, net of 
£3,815 million liabilities) 

Refer to page 60 (Audit Committee Report), 
page 136 (accounting policy) and page 108 
(financial disclosures). 

Subjective valuation 
Significant estimates are made in valuing the 
Group’s post retirement defined benefit plan 
obligations, including in particular the discount 
rate, the inflation assumptions and the 
mortality assumptions. Small changes in the 
assumptions and estimates used to value the 
Group’s pension obligations (before deducting 
scheme assets) would have a significant effect 
on the financial position of the Group. 

Our response 

Our procedures included: 

•  Our statistical expertise: with the 
assistance of our own statistical 
specialists, assessing and evaluating 
the methodology used by the Group’s 
independent third party specialist to 
determine the number of stamps held at 
the balance sheet date and its consistent 
application year on year. 

•  Benchmarking assumptions: 

challenging key assumptions and inputs 
to the calculation, including survey size, 
household data and caps in place to 
address the impact of abnormal holdings. 

•  Survey specialist’s credentials: 

assessing the competence, independence 
and integrity of the Group’s third party 
survey specialist which provides the 
survey data. 

•  Independent reperformance: testing 

the revenue data used in the calculation, 
agreeing inputs to the survey specialist’s 
results, reperforming the calculation of 
deferred revenue and comparing this to 
the Group’s result. 

•  Assessing transparency: Considering 
the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
in respect of the deferred revenue 
adjustment. 

Our procedures included: 

•  Benchmarking assumptions: challenging 

key assumptions applied, being the 
discount rate, inflation rate, mortality 
and salary growth with the support of 
our own actuarial specialists, including a 
comparison of key assumptions against 
market data. 

•  Actuary’s credentials: assessing the 

competence, independence and integrity 
of the Group’s actuarial expert. 

•  Assessing transparency: considering 

the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures in 
respect of the sensitivity of the surplus to 
key assumptions. 

90 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

2. Our assessment of risks of material misstatement

Industrial disease claims provision 
(£84 million, 2015-16: £78 million) 

Refer to page 60 (Audit Committee Report), 
page 137 (accounting policy) and page 128 
(financial disclosures). 

The risk

Subjective estimate 
A number of judgments are made in the 
assessment of the Group’s liability for 
industrial disease claims including the future 
number of claims, average cost of claims, 
future claims inflation and discount rate. 

Our response

Our procedures included: 

•  Our valuation expertise: with the 
assistance of our own valuation 
specialists, assessing the method used 
by the Group’s independent adviser to 
calculate the provision based on our 
experience of models used in the market 
for comparative types of provisions. 

•  Benchmarking assumptions: 

challenging the assumptions used, 
including the discount rate and the 
historical incidence of claims, in the 
calculation of the provision, including 
a comparison against the UK Asbestos 
Working Party Update 2009. 

•  Third party provider credentials: 

assessing the competence, independence 
and integrity of the Group’s third party 
adviser used in estimating the industrial 
disease provision. 

•  Assessing transparency: considering 

the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures in 
respect of this provision. 

Ofcom investigation contingent liability 

Dispute outcome 

•  Our procedures included: 

Refer to page 60 (Audit Committee Report), 
page 143 (accounting policy) and page 130 
(financial disclosures). 

An investigation by Ofcom is ongoing. Ofcom’s 
provisional view is that Royal Mail breached 
competition law by engaging in conduct that 
amounted to unlawful discrimination against 
postal operators competing with Royal Mail 
delivery. 

Depending on the outcome of the Ofcom 
investigation and any appeal, Royal Mail may 
be fined. Whether a liability to the Group will 
result from this investigation is inherently 
uncertain. 

Acquisition accounting 
Valuation of intangible assets in the acquisition 
of GSO and ASM 

Subjective estimate 
The Group made two acquisitions during the 
year, ASM in June and GSO in September. 

£90 million goodwill and £56 million intangible 
assets arising on acquisition 

Refer to page 60 (Audit Committee Report), 
page 137 (accounting policy) and page 114 
(financial disclosures). 

The exercise to recognise the intangible assets 
acquired at fair value involves a significant 
degree of judgement in relation to the inputs 
used to value the intangibles, including 
estimated useful economic life and discount 
rate giving rise to a material estimate. 

•  Enquiry with lawyers: inspecting 
correspondence with Ofcom and 
holding discussions with the Group’s in 
house team. 

•  Accounting analysis: challenging the 

assessment performed by the Directors to 
determine if the criteria for recognising a 
provision have been met. 

•  Assessing transparency: Considering 

the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures in 
respect of the contingent liability. 

Our procedures included: 

•  Our valuation expertise: with the 
assistance of our own valuation 
specialists, assessing and evaluating 
the methodology used by the Group’s 
independent third party experts to value 
the intangible assets acquired. 

•  Benchmarking assumptions: using 

our sector experience and knowledge, 
challenging the key assumptions used in 
the valuation including estimated useful 
economic life and discount rate. 

•  Valuer’s credentials: Assessing the 

competence, independence and integrity 
of the Group’s valuation expert. 

•  Assessing transparency: considering 

the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures in 
respect of determining the fair value of the 
intangible assets acquired.  

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  91

Royal Mail plc 

| 

Independent auditor’s report

3.  Our application of 
materiality and an 
overview of the scope of 
our audit 

Materiality for the Group financial statements 
as a whole was set at £20 million (2015-16: 
£18 million), determined with reference 
to a benchmark of Group profit before tax, 
adjusted to add back the IFRS 2 charge for 
employee free shares issued and to add back 
the loss on disposal of business net of profit 
on disposal of property, plant and equipment, 
of £428 million of which it represents 
5 per cent (2015-16: 5 per cent). The items 
not included in the benchmark were all 
subject to audit procedures by the Group 
audit team. 

We reported to the Audit Committee 
any corrected or uncorrected identified 
misstatements exceeding a profit before 
tax impact of £1.0 million or a balance 
sheet reclassification impact of £5.0 
million, in addition to other identified 
misstatements that warranted reporting on 
qualitative grounds. 

Of the Group’s three (2015-16: three) 
reporting components, we subjected two 
(2015-16: two) to full scope audits for Group 
purposes. The components within the scope 
of our work accounted for the percentages of 
the Group’s results illustrated opposite. 

The work on one of the two components 
(2015-16: one of the two components) was 
performed by component auditors and the 
rest by the Group audit team. 

For the residual component, we performed 
analysis at an aggregated Group level to 
re-examine our assessment that there were 
no significant risks of material misstatement. 

The Group audit team instructed component 
auditors as to the significant areas to be 
covered, including the relevant risks detailed 
above and the information to be reported 
back. The Group audit team also approved 
the component materialities having regard to 
the mix of size and risk profile of the Group 
across the components. 

The Group audit team visited the GLS 
component (2015-16: GLS component) at the 
planning, execution and finalisation stages 
of the audit including to assess the audit risk 
and strategy. Video and telephone conference 
meetings were also held regularly with the 
component auditor, including specific calls 
held in relation to the acquisition accounting 
for the two acquisitions made by GLS in 
the year. Part of these visits and meetings 
included discussion of the findings reported 
to the Group audit team in more detail, and 
any further work required by the Group 
audit team was then performed by the 
component auditor. 

Profit before tax excluding 
certain items* 
£428 million (2015-16: £396 million) 

Materiality 
£20 million (2015-16: £18 million) 

£20 million 
Whole financial statements 
materiality (2015-16: 
£18 million) 

Adjusted profit 
Group materiality 

£18 million 
Materiality at components 
£18m (2015-16: £16 million) 

£1.0 million 
Misstatements reported to 
the audit committee 
(2015-16: £0.9 million) 

*Items added back to Group profit before tax are the IFRS 2 charge for employee free shares issued (2016-17: £105 million, 
2015-16: £158 million), loss on disposal of business (2016-17: £2 million, 2015-16: £nil) and net of profit on disposal of 
property, plant and equipment (2016-17: £14 million, 2015-16: £29 million). 

Group revenue 

Group profit before tax 

100% 

(2015-16 100%) 

100% 

(2015-16 100%) 

100 

100 

100 

100 

Group total assets

98% 

(2015-16 98%) 

98 

98 

 Full scope for Group audit purposes 2016-17

 Full scope for Group audit purposes 2015-16

 Residual components

92 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Scope and responsibilities 
As explained more fully in the Directors’ 
Responsibilities Statement set out on 
page 87, the directors are responsible for 
the preparation of the financial statements 
and for being satisfied that they give a true 
and fair view. A description of the scope of 
an audit of financial statements is provided 
on the Financial Reporting Council’s website 
at www.frc.org.uk/auditscopeukprivate. 
This report is made solely to the Company’s 
members as a body and is subject to important 
explanations and disclaimers regarding our 
responsibilities, published on our website at 
www.kpmg.com/uk/auditscopeukco2014a, 
which are incorporated into this report as if 
set out in full and should be read to provide an 
understanding of the purpose of this report, 
the work we have undertaken and the basis of 
our opinions. 

Richard Pinckard (Senior Statutory Auditor) 

for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory 
Auditor  
Chartered Accountants 
15 Canada Square, London, E14 5GL 

17 May 2017

In particular, we are required to report to 
you if: 

•  we have identified material 

inconsistencies between the knowledge 
we acquired during our audit and the 
directors’ statement that they consider 
that the annual report and financial 
statements taken as a whole is fair, 
balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the group’s 
position and performance, business model 
and strategy; or 

• 

the Audit and Risk committee report 
does not appropriately address matters 
communicated by us to the Audit and 
Risk Committee. 

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are 
required to report to you if, in our opinion: 

•  adequate accounting records have not 
been kept by the parent company, or 
returns adequate for our audit have not 
been received from branches not visited 
by us; or 

• 

the parent company financial 
statements and the part of the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report to be audited are 
not in agreement with the accounting 
records and returns; or 

•  certain disclosures of directors’ 

remuneration specified by law are not 
made; or 

•  we have not received all the information 

and explanations we require for our audit. 

Under the Listing Rules we are required 
to review: 

• 

• 

the Directors’ statements, set out on 
page 41, in relation to going concern and 
longer-term viability; and 

the part of the Corporate Governance 
Statement on page 54 relating to the 
company’s compliance with the eleven 
provisions of the 2014 UK Corporate 
Governance Code specified for our review. 

We have nothing to report in respect of the 
above responsibilities. 

4.  Our opinion on other 

matters prescribed by 
the  Companies Act 2006 
is unmodified 

In our opinion: 

• 

• 

the part of the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report to be audited has been properly 
prepared in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006; and 

the information given in the Strategic 
Report and the Directors’ Report for 
the financial year is consistent with the 
financial statements. 

Based solely on the work required to be 
undertaken in the course of the audit of the 
financial statements and from reading the 
Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report: 

•  we have not identified material 

misstatements in those reports; and 

• 

in our opinion, those reports have 
been prepared in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006. 

5.  We have nothing to 

report on the disclosures 
of principal risks 

Based on the knowledge we acquired during 
our audit, we have nothing material to add or 
draw attention to in relation to: 

• 

the Directors’ statement of viability on 
page 41, concerning the Principal Risks, 
their management, and, based on that, the 
directors’ assessment and expectations 
of the group’s continuing in operation over 
the three years to 2020; or 

• 

the disclosures in Note 1 of the financial 
statements concerning the use of the 
going concern basis of accounting. 

6.  We have nothing to 

report in respect of the 
matters on which we 
are required to report 
by exception 

Under ISAs (UK and Ireland) we are required 
to report to you if, based on the knowledge we 
acquired during our audit, we have identified 
other information in the annual report that 
contains a material inconsistency with either 
that knowledge or the financial statements, 
a material misstatement of fact, or that is 
otherwise misleading. 

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  93

 
Royal Mail plc 

| 

94 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  95

Royal Mail plc 

| 

96 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  97

Royal Mail plc 

| 

98 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  99

Royal Mail plc 

| 

100 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  101

Royal Mail plc 

| 

102 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  103

Royal Mail plc 

| 

104 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  105

Royal Mail plc 

| 

106 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  107

Royal Mail plc 

| 

108 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

•

•

•

•

•

•

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  109

Royal Mail plc 

| 

110 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  111

Royal Mail plc 

| 

112 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  113

Royal Mail plc 

| 

114 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  115

Royal Mail plc 

| 

116 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  117

Royal Mail plc 

| 

118 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  119

Royal Mail plc 

| 

120 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  121

Royal Mail plc 

| 

122 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  123

Royal Mail plc 

| 

124 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  125

Royal Mail plc 

| 

126 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  127

Royal Mail plc 

| 

128 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  129

Royal Mail plc 

| 

130 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  131

Royal Mail plc 

| 

132 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  133

Royal Mail plc 

| 

134 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  135

Royal Mail plc 

| 

136 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
•

•

•

•

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  137

Royal Mail plc 

| 

138 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

•

•

•

•

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  139

Royal Mail plc 

| 

140 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  141

Royal Mail plc 

| 

142 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  143

Royal Mail plc 

| 

144 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  145

Royal Mail plc 

| 

146 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  147

Royal Mail plc 

| 

148 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

 
 
Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  149

Royal Mail plc 

|  Other information

150 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Strategic report 

|  Governance 

|  Financial statements 

|  Other information

•

•

•

•

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17 

|  151

Royal Mail plc 

|  Other information

152 

|  Annual Report and Financial Statements 2016-17

Royal Mail, the cruciform, Parcelforce Worldwide and the Parcelforce Worldwide logo are  
trade marks of Royal Mail Group Limited. The GLS arrow logo is a trade mark of General Logistics 
Systems Germany GmbH & Co. OHG. Annual Report 2016-17 © Royal Mail Group Limited 2016. 
All rights reserved.